Buyandsell.gc.ca

Buyandsell.gc.ca
Fit-up R H Coats Building/Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054/A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell.gc.ca
Canada.gc.ca
Services
Departments
Français
Buyandsell.gc.ca
Public Works and Government Services Canada
For Businesses
Home
For Government
Procurement Data
Tenders
Goods and Services
Search
Search
Applications
Procurement Data
Fit-up R H Coats Building/Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054/A)
Fit-up R H Coats Building/Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054/A)
Service Upgrade - 2014-05-14: Upgrades to the Buyandsell.gc.ca web service will begin at 20:00 ET Wednesday, May 14, 2014. Site visitors should not
experience any service interruption during the upgrade. Further details regarding the upgrades will be released Thursday, May 15, 2014.
Tender Notice
Status
Access and terms of use
Publishing status
Active
Days to closing
3 weeks 1 day hence
Dates
Publication date
2014/05/14
Amendment date
2014/05/14
Date closing
2014/06/05 14:00 Eastern Daylight Time
(EDT)
Details
Reference number
PW-$$FG-340-65101
Solicitation number
EP067-150054/A
Region of delivery
National Capital Region
Notice type
Notice of Proposed Procurement (NPP)
GSIN
5177BA: Interior Fit-Up/Renovations
Trade agreement
Agreement on Internal Trade (AIT)
Tendering procedure
All interested suppliers may submit a bid
Competitive
procurement strategy
Lowest/Lower Bid
Procurement entity
Public Works & Government Services
Canada
End user entity
Public Works & Government Services
Canada
Government of Canada (GC) tender notices and awards, solicitation
documents and tender attachments are available free of charge and without
registration on Buyandsell.gc.ca/tenders, the authoritative location for GC
tenders.
You may have received this tender notice or award through a third-party
distributor. The Government of Canada is not responsible for any tender
notices and/or related documents and attachments not accessed directly
through Buyandsell.gc.ca/tenders.
This Government of Canada tender notice or tender award carries an Open
Government Licence - Canada that governs its use. Related solicitation
documents and/or tender attachments are copyright protected. Please refer to
the section about Commercial Reproduction in the Buyandsell.gc.ca Terms
and Conditions for more information.
Activity
The following statistics are only for the English page and are current as of:
2014-05-14 09:49 Eastern Daylight Time (EDT). To calculate the total
statistics for a tender notice, you will need to add the English and French
statistics.
Page views
(English page)
4
Unique page views
(English page)
4
Tender Notice feed
Get notifications for this search result using a
or
web feed:
For more information on notifications, visit
the Follow Opportunities page.
Contact Information
Contact name
Brouillet, Richard
Contact phone
(819) 956-0457 ( )
Contact fax
(819) 956-8335
Contact address
11 Laurier St./11 Rue Laurier
3C2, Place du Portage
Description
Trade Agreement: Agreement on Internal Trade (AIT)
Tendering Procedures: All interested suppliers may submit a bid
Attachment: None
Competitive Procurement Strategy: Lowest/Lower Bid
file:///P|/In Progress/Coats Building/Fit-up R H Coats Building-Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054-A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell_gc_ca.htm[5/14/2014 1:01:26 PM]
Fit-up R H Coats Building/Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054/A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell.gc.ca
Phase III
Gatineau, Québec K1A 0S5
Comprehensive Land Claim Agreement: No
Nature of Requirements:
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:
R.067898.002
Project description: Refurbishment to implement Workplace 2.0
designs on the 11th, 14th and 19th floors of the R.H. Coats
Building at 100 Tunney's Pasture Driveway and the 7th floor of
the Jean Talon Building at 170 Tunney's Pasture Driveway, Ottawa
Work is to be completed within forty-two (42) weeks after
contract award. The estimated cost for this opportunity is
within the following category: $1,000,001.00 - $5,000,000.00.
OPTIONAL SITE VISIT:
There will be a site visit on May 21, 2014 at 10am. Interested
bidders shall meet at the security desk of the Main Stats
Building 150 Tunney's Pasture, Ottawa, ON.
ENQUIRIES:
All enquiries are to be submitted to the Contractual Authority:
Richard Brouillet, Tel: (819)956-0457, facsimile (819) 956-8335
or by email at [email protected]
Enquiries are to be made in writing and should be received no
less than five (5) calendar days prior to the closing date to
allow sufficient time to respond.
BID DOCUMENTS:
Firms intending to submit bids on this project should obtain bid
documents through the Government Electronic Tendering Service at
http://Buyandsell.gc.ca/tenders or at the toll-free number
1-855-886-3030.
Amendments, when issued, will be available from the same
government electronic tendering service.
Firms that elect to base their bids on bid documents obtained
from other sources do so at their own risk and will be solely
responsible to inform the bid calling authority of their
intention to bid.
BID RECEIVING:
Sealed bids will be received at: Public Works and Government
Services Canada, Bid Receiving Unit, Place du Portage, Phase
III, Main Lobby Core 0A1, 11 Laurier Street, Gatineau, Quebec,
K1A 1C9.
Delivery Date: Above-mentioned
The Crown retains the right to negotiate with suppliers on any
procurement.
Documents may be submitted in either official language of Canada.
Solicitation Documents
Amendment
number
File
Unique Download Event (English
page)
Language
Date
added
ABES.PROD.PW__FG.B340.E65101.EBSU000.PDF
000
English
0
2014-05-14
ABES.PROD.PW__FG.B340.F65101.EBSU000.PDF
000
French
0
2014-05-14
file:///P|/In Progress/Coats Building/Fit-up R H Coats Building-Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054-A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell_gc_ca.htm[5/14/2014 1:01:26 PM]
Fit-up R H Coats Building/Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054/A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell.gc.ca
Attachments
File
Amendment number
project_r067898-002.zip
Not available
Language
Bilingual
Unique Download Event (English page)
0
Date added
Not available
Date modified: 2014-05-14
Terms and Conditions
Transparency
About Us
News
Contact Us
Site Map
Event Calendar
Provide Feedback
HEALTH
TRAVEL
SERVICE CANADA
JOBS
ECONOMY
healthycanadians.gc.ca
travel.gc.ca
servicecanada.gc.ca
jobbank.gc.ca
actionplan.gc.ca
Canada.gc.ca
file:///P|/In Progress/Coats Building/Fit-up R H Coats Building-Jean Talon Building (EP067-150054-A) - Procurement Information on Buyandsell_gc_ca.htm[5/14/2014 1:01:26 PM]
Project No. R.067898.002
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Section 00 01 10
Page 1 of 4
DRAWINGS:
ARCHITECTURAL
A001
A002
COVER PAGE, DRAWING LIST, CODE MATRIX
LEGEND, ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE
A111
A121
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN; DOOR
SCHEDULE
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLANDEMO
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN –
CONSTRUCTION
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR FINISH PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 14TH FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
A131
A132
A141
A151
A211
A221
A222
A231
A232
A241
A251
A311
A321
A331
A332
A341
A351
A411
A421
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN; DOOR
SCHEDULE
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN –
DEMO
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN CONSTRUCTION
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR FINISH PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 11TH FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
A441
A451
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN; DOOR
SCHEDULE
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN –
DEMO
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN CONSTRUCTION
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR FINISH PLAN
R.H. COATS BLDG. 19TH FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
A501
A502
TYPICAL ELEVATIONS, DETAILS
TYPICAL MILLWORK DETAILS
A431
A432
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR DOOR SCHEDULE
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DEMO
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN CONSTRUCTION
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR FINISH PLAN
JEAN TALON BLDG. 7TH FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
Project No. R.067898.002
MECHANICAL
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Section 00 01 10
Page 2 of 4
M001 MECHANICAL - DRAWING LIST, LEGENDS, SCHEDULES &
DETAILS
M111 R.H.C. - 14TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION& PLUMBING DEMOLITION
M121 R.H.C. - 14TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION & PLUMBING - NEW
WORK
M131 R.H.C. - 14TH FLOOR - HVAC - DEMOLITION
M141 R.H.C. - 14TH FLOOR - HVAC - NEW WORK
M211
M221
M231
M241
J.T. - 7TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION - DEMOLITION
J.T. - 7TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION - NEW WORK
J.T. - 7TH FLOOR - HVAC - DEMOLITION
J.T. - 7TH FLOOR - HVAC - NEW WORK
M311 R.H.C. - 11TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION & PLUMBING DEMOLITION
M321 R.H.C. - 11TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION & PLUMBING - NEW
WORK
M331 R.H.C. - 11TH FLOOR - HVAC - DEMOLITION
M341 R.H.C. - 11TH FLOOR - HVAC - NEW WORK
ELECTRICAL
M411
M421
M431
M441
R.H.C. - 19TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION - DEMOLITION
R.H.C. - 19TH FLOOR - FIRE PROTECTION - NEW WORK
R.H.C. - 19TH FLOOR - HVAC - DEMOLITION
R.H.C. - 19TH FLOOR - HVAC - NEW WORK
E001
ELECTRICAL LEGENDS, DRAWING LIST AND LIGHTING
FIXTURE SCHEDULE
E111
E121
E131
E141
RHC 14 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 14 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM NEW WORK
RHC 14 - POWER AND SYSTEMS DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 14 - POWER AND SYSTEMS NEW WORK AND PANEL
SCHEDULES
E211
E221
E231
E241
E251
JT 7 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION WORK
JT 7 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM NEW WORK
JT 7 - POWER AND SYSTEMS DEMOLITION WORK
JT 7 - POWER AND SYSTEMS NEW WORK
JT 7 - ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES
E311
E321
E331
E341
RHC 11 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 11 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM NEW WORK
RHC 11 - POWER AND SYSTEMS DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 11 - POWER AND SYSTEMS NEW WORK AND PANEL
SCHEDULES
Project No. R.067898.002
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Section 00 01 10
Page 3 of 4
E411
E421
E431
E441
RHC 19 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 19 - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM NEW WORK
RHC 19 - POWER AND SYSTEMS DEMOLITION WORK
RHC 19 - POWER AND SYSTEMS NEW WORK AND PANEL
SCHEDULES
SPECIFICATIONS:
DIVISION
SECTION
DIVISION 01
01 00 10
01 14 25
01 33 00
01 35 29.06
01 45 00
01 61 00
01 73 00
01 74 21
01 78 00
01 91 13
DIVISION 06
DIVISION 07
DIVISION 08
DIVISION 09
DIVISION 10
01 91 33
01 91 41
06 40 00
07 92 00
08 11 00
08 14 16
08 71 00
08 80 50
09 21 16
09 22 16
09 30 13
09 51 99
09 65 16
09 91 23
09 91 23.01
10 22 26.33
10 44 16.19
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES REPORT
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
QUALITY CONTROL
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX)
REQUIREMENTS
COMMISSIONING FORMS
COMMISSIONING: TRAINING
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
JOINT SEALANTS
METAL FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
CERAMIC TILING
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
INTERIOR PAINTING
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND SAFETY
BLANKETS
NO. OF
PAGES
7
13
5
3
3
4
3
10
7
9
3
3
9
6
4
4
7
6
7
4
4
5
6
12
11
5
2
DIVISION 21
21 05 01
21 13 13
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
3
5
DIVISION 22
22 42 16
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS
3
DIVISION 23
23 05 49.01
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS) - TYPE P2
BUILDINGS
5
Project No. R.067898.002
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Section 00 01 10
Page 4 of 4
23 05 93
5
23 07 13
23 31 13.01
23 33 00
23 33 14
23 33 46
23 33 53
23 34 00
23 36 00
23 37 13
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR
HVAC
DUCT INSULATION
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
DAMPERS – BALANCING
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
DUCT LINERS
HVAC FANS
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
DIVISION 25
25 05 01
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5
DIVISION 26
26 05 00
26 05 20
26 05 21
26 05 29
7
1
1
1
26 50 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000 V)
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND
CABINETS
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND
FITTINGS
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND
CONDUIT FITTINGS
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS) - TYPE P2
WIRING DEVICES
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES – FUSED AND NONFUSED
LIGHTING
27 05 28
27 51 19
28 31 00
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
26 05 31
26 05 32
26 05 34
26 05 40
26 27 26
26 28 16.02
26 28 23
DIVISION 27
DIVISION 28
END OF TABLE
4
4
3
3
2
4
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
4
2
1
3
2
12
5
Public Works and Government Services
Canada
Travaux publics et Services
gouvernementaux Canada
1 1
RETURN BIDS TO:
RETOURNER LES SOUMISSIONS À:
Title - Sujet
Bid Receiving - PWGSC / Réception des
soumissions - TPSGC
11 Laurier St./11 rue Laurier
Place du Portage, Phase III
Core 0A1 / Noyau 0A1
Gatineau, Québec K1A 0S5
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Date
EP067-150054/A
2014-05-13
Client Reference No. - N° de référence du client
GETS Ref. No. - N° de réf. de SEAG
20150054
PW-$$FG-340-65101
Fit-up/Aménager R H Coats Bldg
File No. - N° de dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No./N° VME
fg340.EP067-150054
INVITATION TO TENDER
APPEL D'OFFRES
Tender To: Public Works and Government Services
Canada
We hereby offer to sell to Her Majesty the Queen in right of
Canada, in accordance with the terms and conditions set
out herein, referred to herein or attached hereto, the goods,
services, and construction listed herein and on any attached
sheets at the price(s) set out therefor.
Soumission aux: Travaux Publics et Services
Gouvernementaux Canada
Nous offrons par la présente de vendre à Sa Majesté la
Reine du chef du Canada, aux conditions énoncées ou
incluses par référence dans la présente et aux annexes
ci-jointes, les biens, services et construction énumérés
ici et sur toute feuille ci-annexée, au(x) prix indiqué(s).
Solicitation Closes - L'invitation prend fin Time Zone
Fuseau horaire
at - à 02:00 PM
Eastern Daylight
Saving Time EDT
on - le 2014-06-05
F.O.B. - F.A.B.
Plant-Usine:
Destination:
Other-Autre:
Buyer Id - Id de l'acheteur
Address Enquiries to: - Adresser toutes questions à:
fg340
Brouillet, Richard
Telephone No. - N° de téléphone
FAX No. - N° de FAX
(819) 956-0457 (
(819) 956-8335
)
Destination - of Goods, Services, and Construction:
Destination - des biens, services et construction:
PUBLIC WORKS AND GOVERNMENT SERVICES CANADA
R H COATS AND JEAN TALON BUILDINGS
100 & 170 TUNNEY'S PASTURE DRIVEWAY
OTTAWA, ON K1A 0T6
Comments - Commentaires
Instructions: See Herein
Instructions: Voir aux présentes
Vendor/Firm Name and Address
Raison sociale et adresse du
fournisseur/de l'entrepreneur
Delivery Required - Livraison exigée
Delivery Offered - Livraison proposée
See Herein
Vendor/Firm Name and Address
Raison sociale et adresse du fournisseur/de l'entrepreneur
Issuing Office - Bureau de distribution
Telephone No. - N° de téléphone
Facsimile No. - N° de télécopieur
Construction Services Division/Division des services
de construction
11 Laurier St./11 Rue Laurier
3C2, Place du Portage
Phase III
Gatineau, Québec K1A 0S5
Name and title of person authorized to sign on behalf of Vendor/Firm
(type or print)
Nom et titre de la personne autorisée à signer au nom du fournisseur/
de l'entrepreneur (taper ou écrire en caractères d'imprimerie)
Signature
Canada
Page 1 of - de 13
Date
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
INVITATION TO TENDER
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO BIDDERS
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
PWGSC is limiting the Contractor’s first party liability for work in Low Rise, High Rise and Heritage
Buildings. See changes to GC1.6 “Indemnification by the Contractor” of R2810D in the Supplementary
Conditions.
INSURANCE TERMS
The Certificate of Insurance and it’s instructions has been replaced - see Annex B. (Completed certificate
is NOT required at bid closing).
R2940D CLAUSE IS CANCELLED AND SECTION 3.8 OF R2830D IS MODIFIED
Following the repeal of the Fair Wages and Hours of Labour Act, R2940D clause is cancelled for
contracts awarded after January 1st 2014. For contracts awarded prior to that date the clause remains
applicable.
The “Code of Conduct-Bid” is replaced with “Integrity Provision-Bid” and some modifications to the
clause where done. See R2710T R2410T GI01.
Page 2 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (SI)
SI01
Integrity Provisions – Associated Information
SI02
Bid Documents
SI03
Enquiries during the Solicitation Period
SI04
Optional Site Visit
SI05
Revision of Bid
SI06
Bid Results
SI07
Insufficient Funding
SI08
Bid Validity Period
SI09
Web Sites
R2710T GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS - CONSTRUCTION SERVICES - BID SECURITY
REQUIREMENTS (GI) (2014-03-01)
The following GI’s are included by reference and are available at the following Web Site:
https://buyandsell.gc.ca/policy-and-guidelines/standard-acquisition-clauses-and-conditions-manual/5/R/
GI01 Integrity Provisions - Bid
GI02 Completion of Bid
GI03 Identity or Legal Capacity of the Bidder
GI04 Applicable Taxes
GI05 Capital Development and Redevelopment Charges
GI06 Registry and Pre-qualification of Floating Plant
GI07 Listing of Subcontractors and Suppliers
GI08 Bid Security Requirements
GI09 Submission of Bid
GI10 Revision of Bid
GI11 Rejection of Bid
GI12 Bid Costs
GI13 Procurement Business Number
GI14 Compliance With Applicable Laws
GI15 Approval of Alternative Materials
GI16 Performance Evaluation
GI17 Conflict of Interest-Unfair Advantage
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (SC)
SC01 Limitation of Liability
SC02 Insurance Terms
BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM (BA)
BA01 Identification
BA02 Business Name and Address of Bidder
BA03 The Offer
BA04 Bid Validity Period
BA05 Acceptance and Contract
BA06 Construction Time
BA07 Bid Security
BA08 Signature
Page 3 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
APPENDIX 1 - COMPLETE LIST OF EACH INDIVIDUAL WHO ARE CURRENTLY DIRECTORS
AND/OR OWNERS OF THE BIDDER
ANNEX A - CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FORM
Page 4 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (SI)
SI01
INTEGRITY PROVISIONS - ASSOCIATED INFORMATION
By submitting a bid, the Bidder certifies that the Bidder and its Affiliates are in compliance with the
provisions as stated in Section 01 Integrity Provisions - Bid of General Instructions Construction
Services R2410T General Instructions – Construction Services – Bid Security Requirements. The
associated information required within the Integrity Provisions will assist Canada in confirming that the
certifications are true.
SI02
BID DOCUMENTS
1.
The following are the bid documents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Invitation to Tender - Page 1;
Special Instructions to Bidders;
General Instructions - Construction Services - Bid Security Requirements R2710T(2014-03-01)
Clauses & Conditions identified in “Contract Documents”;
Drawings and Specifications;
Bid and Acceptance Form and related Appendix(s); and
Any amendment issued prior to solicitation closing.
Submission of a bid constitutes acknowledgement that the Bidder has read and agrees to be bound by
these documents.
2.
General Instructions - Construction Services - Bid Security Requirements R2710T is
incorporated by reference and is set out in the Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC)
Manual, issued by Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC). The SACC Manual is
available on the PWGSC Web site:
https://buyandsell.gc.ca/policy-and-guidelines/standard-acquisition-clauses-and-conditions-manual/5/R
SI03
ENQUIRIES DURING THE SOLICITATION PERIOD
1.
Enquiries regarding this bid must be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer named on
the Invitation to Tender - Page 1 as early as possible within the solicitation period. Except for
the approval of alternative materials as described in GI15 of R2710T, enquiries should be
received no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the date set for solicitation closing to allow
sufficient time to provide a response. Enquiries received after that time may not result in an
answer being provided.
2.
an
To ensure consistency and quality of the information provided to Bidders, the Contracting
Officer shall examine the content of the enquiry and shall decide whether or not to issue
amendment.
SI04
OPTIONAL SITE VISIT
There will be a site visit on May 21, 2014 at 10am. Interested bidders shall meet at the security desk of
the Main Stats Building – 150 Tunney’s Pasture, Ottawa, ON.
Page 5 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
SI05
fg340
REVISION OF BID
A bid may be revised by letter or facsimile in accordance with GI10 of R2710T. The facsimile number
for receipt of revisions is (819) 956-1459.
SI06
BID RESULTS
1.
A public bid opening will be held in the office designated on the Front Page “Invitation to
Tender” for the receipt of bids shortly after the time set for solicitation closing.
2.
Following solicitation closing, bid results may be obtained by faxing at No. (819) 956-1459
SI07
INSUFFICIENT FUNDING
In the event that the lowest compliant bid exceeds the amount of funding allocated for the Work, Canada
in its sole discretion may
a.
cancel the solicitation; or
b.
obtain additional funding and award the Contract to the Bidder submitting the lowest compliant
bid; and/or
c.
negotiate a reduction in the bid price and/or scope of work of not more than 15% with the Bidder
submitting the lowest compliant bid. Should an agreement satisfactory to Canada not be
reached,
Canada shall exercise option (a) or (b).
SI08
BID VALIDITY PERIOD
1.
Canada reserves the right to seek an extension to the bid validity period prescribed in BA04 of
the
Bid and Acceptance Form. Upon notification in writing from Canada, Bidders shall have the
option to either accept or reject the proposed extension.
2.
If the extension referred to in paragraph 1.of SI08 is accepted, in writing, by all those who
submitted bids, then Canada shall continue immediately with the evaluation of the bids
and its
approvals processes.
3.
If the extension referred to in paragraph 1.of SI08 is not accepted in writing by all those who
submitted bids then Canada shall, at its sole discretion, either
a.continue to evaluate the bids of those who have accepted the proposed extension and
seek the necessary approvals; or
b.cancel the invitation to tender.
4.
The provisions expressed herein do not in any manner limit Canada’s rights in law or under
GI11 of R2710T.
Page 6 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
SI09
fg340
WEB SITES
The connection to some of the Web sites in the solicitation documents is established by the use of
hyperlinks. The following is a list of the addresses of the Web sites:
Treasury Board Appendix L, Acceptable Bonding Companies
http://www.tbs-sct.gc.ca/pol/doc-eng.aspx?id=14494&section=text#appL
Buy and Sell https://www.achatsetventes-buyandsell.gc.ca
Canadian economic sanctions http://www.international.gc.ca/sanctions/index.aspx?lang=eng
Contractor Performance Evaluation Report (Form PWGSC-TPSGC 2913)
http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/documents/2913.pdf
Bid Bond (form PWGSC-TPSGC 504) http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/documents/504.pdf
Performance Bond (form PWGSC-TPSGC 505)
http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/documents/505.pdf
Labour and Material Payment Bond (form PWGWSC-TPSGC 506)
http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/documents/506.pdf
Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC) Manual
ttps://buyandsell.gc.ca/policy-and-guidelines/standard-acquisition-clauses-and-conditions-manual/5/R
Schedules of Wage Rates for Federal Construction Contracts
http://www.labour.gc.ca/eng/standards_equity/contracts/schedules/index.shtml
PWGSC, Industrial Security Services http://ssi-iss.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/index-eng.html
PWGSC, Code of Conduct and Certifications
http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/cndt-cndct/index-eng.html
PWGSC Consent to a Criminal Record Verification (PWGSC-TPSGC 229)
http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/documents/229.pdf
Construction and Consultant Services Contract Administration Forms Real Property Contracting
Http://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/app-acq/forms/formulaires-forms-eng.html
Page 7 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (SC)
SC01
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
GC1.6 of R2810D is deleted and replaced with the following:
GC1.6 Indemnification by the Contractor
1.
The Contractor shall indemnify and save Canada harmless from and against all claims,
demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings whether in respect to losses
suffered by Canada or in respect of claims by any third party, brought or prosecuted and in
any manner based upon, arising out of, related to, occasioned by, or attributable to the
activities of the Contractor in performing the Work, provided such claims are caused by the
negligent or deliberate acts or omissions of the Contractor, or those for whom it is responsible
at law.
2.
The Contractor's obligation to indemnify Canada for losses related to first party liability shall
be limited to:
a.
In respect to each loss for which insurance is to be provided pursuant to the
insurance requirements of the Contract, the Commercial General Liability insurance
limit for one occurrence as referred to in the insurance requirements of the Contract.
b.
In respect to losses for which insurance is not required to be provided in accordance
with the insurance requirements of the Contract, the greater of the Contract Amount
or $5,000,000, but in no event shall the sum be greater than $20,000,000.
The limitation of this obligation shall be exclusive of interest and all legal costs and shall not
apply to any infringement of intellectual property rights or any breach of warranty obligations.
3.
The Contractor's obligation to indemnify Canada for losses related to third party
liability shall have no limitation and shall include the complete costs of defending any legal
action by a third party. If requested by Canada, the Contractor shall defend Canada against
any third party claims.
4.
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and patent fees required for the performance of the
Contract and, at the Contractor's expense, shall defend all claims, actions or
proceedings
against Canada charging or claiming that the Work or any part thereof
provided or furnished
by the Contractor to Canada infringes any patent, industrial design,
copyright trademark, trade
secret or other proprietary right enforceable in Canada.
5.
such
Notice in writing of a claim shall be given within a reasonable time after the facts, upon which
claim is based, became known.
Page 8 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
SC02 INSURANCE TERMS
1)
Insurance Contracts
(a) The Contractor must, at the Contractor's expense, obtain and maintain insurance contracts
in accordance with the requirements of the Certificate of Insurance. Coverage must be
placed with an Insurer licensed to carry out business in Canada.
(b) Compliance with the insurance requirements does not release the Contractor from or reduce
its liability under the Contract. The Contractor is responsible for deciding if additional
insurance coverage is necessary to fulfill its obligation under the Contract and to ensure
compliance with any applicable law. Any additional insurance coverage is at the Contractor's
expense, and for its own benefit and protection.
2)
3)
4)
Period of Insurance
(a)
The policies required in the Certificate of Insurance must be in force from the date of
contract award and be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract.
(b)
The Contractor must be responsible to provide and maintain coverage for
Products/Completed Operations hazards on its Commercial General Liability
insurance policy, for a period of six (6) years beyond the date of the Certificate of
Substantial Performance.
Proof of Insurance
(a)
Before commencement of the Work, and no later than thirty (30) days after
acceptance of its bid, the Contractor must deposit with Canada a Certificate of
Insurance on the form attached herein.
(b)
Upon request by Canada, the Contractor must provide originals or certified true
copies of all contracts of insurance maintained by the Contractor pursuant to the
Certificate of Insurance.
Insurance Proceeds
In the event of a claim, the Contractor must, without delay, do such things and execute such
documents as are necessary to effect payment of the proceeds.
5)
Deductible
The payment of monies up to the deductible amount made in satisfaction of a claim must be borne by
the Contractor.
Page 9 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (CD)
1.
The following are the contract documents:
a.
Contract Page when signed by Canada;
b.
Duly completed Bid and Acceptance Form and any Appendices attached thereto;
c.
Drawings and Specifications;
d.
General Conditions and clauses
GC1 General Provisions - Construction Services
R2810D(2014-03-01);
GC2 Administration of the Contract
R2820D(2012-07-16);
GC3 Execution and Control of the Work
R2830D(2014-03-01);
GC4 Protective Measures
R2840D(2008-05-12);
GC5 Terms of Payment
R2850D(2010-01-11);
GC6 Delays and Changes in the Work
R2860D(2013-04-25);
GC7 Default, Suspension or Termination of Contract
R2870D(2008-05-12);
GC8 Dispute Resolution
R2880D(2012-07-16);
GC9 Contract Security
R2890D(2012-07-16);
GC10 Insurance
R2900D(2008-05-12);
Supplementary Conditions
Allowable Costs for Contract Changes Under GC6.4.1
R2950D (2007-05-25);
e.
f.
g.
2.
Any amendment issued or any allowable bid revision received before the date and time
set for solicitation closing;
Any amendment incorporated by mutual agreement between Canada and the
Contractor before acceptance of the bid; and
Any amendment or variation of the contract documents that is made in accordance with
the General Conditions.
The documents identified by title, number and date above are incorporated by reference and
are set out in the Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC) Manual, issued by
Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC). The SACC Manual is available
on the PWGSC Web site:
https://buyandsell.gc.ca/policy-and-guidelines/standard-acquisition-clauses-and-conditions-manual
3.
The language of the contract documents is the language of the Bid and Acceptance Form
submitted.
Page 10 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM (BA)
BA01 IDENTIFICATION
Fit-up of the 11th, 14th and 19th floors of the R.H. Coats Building at 100 Tunney’s Pasture Driveway and
the 7th floor of the Jean Talon Building at 170 Tunney’s Pasture Driveway, Ottawa.
BA02
Name:
BUSINESS NAME AND ADDRESS OF BIDDER
____________________________________________________________________________
Address: ____________________________________________________________________________
Telephone: ____________________ Fax: _______________________ PBN:__________________
BA03
THE OFFER
The Bidder offers to Canada to perform and complete the Work for the above named project in
accordance with the Bid Documents for the Total Bid Amount of
$ ____________________________________________________________excluding applicable taxe(s).
(amount in numbers)
BA04
BID VALIDITY PERIOD
The bid shall not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days following the date of solicitation closing.
BA05
ACCEPTANCE AND CONTRACT
Upon acceptance of the Contractor’s offer by Canada, a binding Contract shall be formed between
Canada and the Contractor. The documents forming the Contract shall be the contract documents
identified in Contract Documents (CD).
BA06
CONSTRUCTION TIME
The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work within Forty-two (42) weeks from the date of
notification of acceptance of the offer.
BA07
BID SECURITY
The Bidder is enclosing bid security with its bid in accordance with GI08 - Bid Security Requirements of
R2710T - General Instructions - Construction Services - Bid Security Requirements.
BA08
SIGNATURE
Name and title of person authorized to sign on behalf of Bidder (Type or print)
Signature
Date
Page 11 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
APPENDIX 1 - COMPLETE LIST OF EACH INDIVIDUALS WHO ARE CURRENTLY
DIRECTORS AND/OR OWNERS OF THE BIDDER
NOTE TO BIDDERS
WRITE DIRECTOR’S AND/OR OWNERS SURNAMES AND GIVEN NAMES
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of - de 13
Solicitation No. - N° de l'invitation
Amd. No. - N° de la modif.
Buyer ID - Id de l'acheteur
Client Ref. No. - N° de réf. du client
File No. - N° du dossier
CCC No./N° CCC - FMS No/ N° VME
20150054
fg340EP067-150054
EP067-150054/A
fg340
ANNEX A - CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
Page 13 of - de 13
Project No. R.067898.002
1.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 01 00 10
Page 1 of 7
TAXES
.1
1.2
Pay all taxes properly levied by law (including Federal, Provincial and Municipal).
FEES, PERMITS and CERTIFICATES
.1
1.3
Pay all fees and obtain all permits. Provide authorities with plans and information for
acceptance certificates. Provide inspection certificates as evidence that work conforms to
requirements of Authority having jurisdiction.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
.1
Schedule and execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to the normal
use of premises:
.2
On award of contract submit bar chart construction schedule for work, indicating
anticipated progress stages within time of completion. When the Departmental
Representative has reviewed schedule, incorporate corrections, issue revised baseline
schedule for approval or further correction, and take necessary measures to complete
work within scheduled time. Do not change schedule without notifying Departmental
Representative.
.3
The Work shall comprise 4 construction phases, each of which shall be 8 weeks duration.
.4
Phases follow each other consecutively. .
.5
Allow for demobilization and remobilization between construction phases, with a
timeframe of 3 weeks between completion of one phase and the start of the next.
.6
Return to Site as directed by Departmental Representative after construction completion,
off-hours, to make final electrical connections for systems furniture.
.7
Ensure that Project Schedule includes, at minimum, milestone and activity types as
follows for each 4 phases:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
Award
submittals
permits
mobilization
demolition
disconnect power from existing furniture poles
Remove existing furniture poles (by Departmental Representative)
new partitions
painting
new ceilings
new floors
lighting
electrical
piping
Project No. R.067898.002
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 01 00 10
Page 2 of 7
controls
HVAC
Testing and Commissioning
Substantial Performance
Furniture installation and Client Move-in
Final electrical connection of furniture poles (dates to be provided by
Departmental Representative)
Deficiencies, Total Completion
.8
Work can be performed at all times.
.9
Carry out noise generating work, as defined by the Departmental Representative, during
"off hours" Monday to Friday from 18:00 to 07:00 hours and on Saturdays, Sundays, and
statutory holidays:
.10
Update schedule on a monthly basis reflecting activity changes and completion, as well
as activity in progress
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
References and Codes:
.1
.2
Building Smoking Environment:
.1
.3
Smoking is not permitted in the Building. Obey smoking restrictions on building
property.
Hazardous Material Discovery:
.1
1.5
Materials shall be new and work shall conform to the minimum applicable
standards of the “References” indicated in the specification sections, the National
Building Code of Canada 2010 (NBC) and all applicable Provincial and
Municipal codes. In the case of conflict or discrepancy the most stringent
requirement shall apply.
Stop work immediately when material resembling spray or trowel-applied
asbestos, Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB), mould or other designated substance
hazardous substance is encountered during demolition work.
.1
Take preventative measure and promptly notify Departmental
Representative.
.2
Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from
Departmental Representative.
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with both the National Building Code of Canada 2010 and the National Fire
Code of Canada 2010 for safety of persons in buildings in the event of a fire and the
protection of buildings from the effects of fire, as follows;
.1
.2
The National Building Code (NBC): for fire safety and fire protection features
that are required to be incorporated in a building during construction.
The National Fire Code (NFC):
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
.2
The on-going maintenance and use of the fire safety and fire protection
features incorporated in buildings.
The conduct of activities that might cause fire hazards in and around
buildings.
Limitations on hazardous contents in and around buildings.
The establishment of fire safety plans.
Fire safety at construction and demolition sites.
At least 48 hours prior to commencing cutting, welding or soldering procedure,
provide to Departmental Representative:
.1
Notice of intent, indicating devices affected, time and duration of
isolation or bypass.
.2
Completed welding permit as defined by Departmental Representative.
.3
Return welding permit to Departmental Representative immediately upon
completion of procedures for which permit was issued.
Before welding, soldering, grinding and/or cutting work, obtain a permit from the
Real property Service Provider as directed by the Departmental Representative.
No hot work is shall be undertaken unless authorized by the Real property
Service Provider.
Where work requires interruption or cause activation of fire alarms or fire suppression,
extinguishing or protection systems:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.6
Section 01 00 10
Page 3 of 7
Welding and cutting:
.1
.3
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Provide “Watchman Service” as required by Departmental Representative; In
general, watchman service is defined as an individual conversant with “Fire
Emergency Procedures”, performing fire picket duty within an unprotected and
unoccupied (no workers) area once per hour.
Retain services of manufacturer for fire protection systems on daily basis or as
approved by Departmental Representative, to isolate and protect all devices
relating to:
.1
modification of fire alarms, fire suppression, extinguishing or protection
systems; and/or
.2
cutting, welding, soldering or other construction activities that might
activate fire protection systems.
Immediately upon completion of work, restore fire protection systems to normal
operation and verify that all devices are fully operational.
Inform fire alarm system monitoring agency and local Fire Department
immediately prior to isolation and immediately upon restoration of normal
operation.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
.1
Hazardous Materials: product, substance, or organism that may cause adverse impact to
environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released
into the environment.
.2
Comply with the requirements of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials;
and regarding labelling and the provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
1.7
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 01 00 10
Page 4 of 7
For work in occupied buildings, give the Department Representative 48 hours notice for
work involving designated substances (Ontario Bill 208), hazardous substances (Canada
Labour Code Part II Section 10), and before painting, caulking, installing carpet or using
adhesives and other materials, that cause off gassing.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
.1
Existing services required for work, excluding power required for space temporary
heating, may be used by the Contractor without charge. Ensure capacity is adequate prior
to imposing additional loads. Connect and disconnect at own expense and responsibility.
.2
Maximum power supply of 110 V, 15 A is available and will be provided at no cost.
Connect to existing power supply in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and
provide meters and switching.
.3
Notify the Departmental Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of
services and obtain requisite permission.
.4
Give the Departmental Representative 7 days notice related to each necessary
interruption of any mechanical or electrical service throughout the course of the work.
Keep duration of these interruptions to a minimum. Carry out all interruptions after
normal working hours of the occupants, preferably on weekends.
1.8
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
.1
Access Scaffold:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Designated elevators: to be used by construction personnel and transporting of materials.
.1
.2
.3
.3
Co-ordinate with Departmental Representative.
Protect from damage, safety hazards and overloading of existing equipment.
Freight elevator must be booked 24 hours in advance.
Site Storage:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Scaffolding: install scaffolding in accordance with construction regulations and
in accordance with CSA Z797-09 - Code of Practice for Access Scaffold.
Provide design drawings, signed and sealed by qualified Professional Engineer
licensed in the province of Ontario, where prescribed.
Additions or modifications to scaffolding must be approved by Professional
Engineer in writing.
Storage will be allowed within the area of Work only, no other storage will be
available
Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment.
Move stored products or equipment that interfere with operations of
Departmental Representative or other contractors.
Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
Do not load or permit to load any part of work with weight or force that will
endanger work.
Where security is reduced by work provide temporary means to maintain security.
Project No. R.067898.002
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 01 00 10
Page 5 of 7
.5
Sanitary facilities: the sanitary facilities on the floor of the Work may be used. Keep
facilities clean.
.6
Signage:
.1
.2
.3
.7
Parking:
.1
1.9
Provide common-use signs related to traffic control, information, instruction, use
of equipment, public safety devices, etcetera, in both official languages or by the
use of commonly understood graphic symbols and to approval of the
Departmental Representative.
No advertising will be permitted on this project.
Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project
and dispose of off site, on completion of project or earlier, as directed by
Departmental Representative.
Parking on-site is not available.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
.1
Protection:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
1.10
Protect existing construction, infrastructure, and adjacent areas from damage.
Protect work against damage until take-over.
Protect adjacent areas and floors against the spread of dust and dirt beyond the
work areas.
Protect operatives and other users of site from all hazards.
The contractor shall agree to install proper site separation and identification in order to
maintain "Time and Space" at all times throughout the life of the project. When Building
Operations staff requires access to equipment in order to operate the building, proper
coordination and communication must exist between all parties involved
EXAMINATION and PREPARATION
.1
Examine site and conditions likely to affect work and be familiar and conversant with
existing conditions.
.2
Before commencing work, establish location and extent of services lines in area of work
and notify Departmental Representative of findings.
1.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Carry out Work using qualified licensed workers or apprentices in accordance with
Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification.
.2
Permit employees registered in Provincial apprenticeship program to perform specific
tasks only if under direct supervision of qualified licensed workers.
.3
Determine permitted activities and tasks by apprentices, based on level of training
attended and demonstration of ability to perform specific duties.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.12
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 01 00 10
Page 6 of 7
CLEANING
.1
Clean up as work progresses. At the end of each work period, and more often if ordered
by the Departmental Representative, remove debris from site, neatly stack material for
use, and clean up generally.
.2
Upon completion remove scaffolding, temporary protection and surplus materials. Make
good defects noted at this stage.
.3
Clean and polish glass, mirrors, ceramic tile, aluminum, chrome, stainless steel, baked or
porcelain enamel, plastic laminate and other plastic surfaces, floors, hardware and
washroom fixtures. Clean manufactured articles in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
.4
Clean areas under contract to a condition equal to what previously existed and to
approval of Departmental Representative.
1.13
SECURITY CHECK
.1
1.14
Personnel will be checked-in daily at start of work shift and given a pass in exchange for
acceptable personal identification, which must be worn at all times. Pass must be
returned at end of work shift and personnel checked out.
SECURITY ESCORT
.1
All personnel employed on this project shall be escorted at all times.
.2
Submit an escort request to Departmental Representative at least 72 hours before the
service is needed. For requests submitted within the time mentioned above, the
Departmental Representative will pay for the costs of the security escort. The cost
incurred by a late request will be charged to the Contractor.
.3
Any escort request may be cancelled free of charge if notification of cancellation is given
at least 24 hours before the scheduled time of the escort. The cost incurred by a late
cancellation will be charged to the Contractor.
.4
The calculation of costs will be based on the average hourly rate of a security officer for a
minimum of 8 hours per day for a late service request and 4 hours for late cancellations.
1.15
COST BREAKDOWN
.1
1.16
Before submitting first progress claim, submit breakdown of Contract Amount in detail as
directed by Departmental Representative and aggregating the Contract Amount. Make
revisions as required by Departmental Representative. After approval by Departmental
Representative cost breakdown will be used as the basis of progress payments.
PRECEDENCE
.1
For Federal Government projects, Division 01 Sections take precedence over technical
specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Not used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 00 10
Page 7 of 7
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1 An investigation into the presence of designated
substances for the Floor Refurbishment Project, located at
the R.H. Coates and Jean-Talon Buildings, 100 and 170
Tunney’s Pasture Drive respectively in Ottawa, Ontario, was
performed in order to meet the requirements of the Canada
Labour Code under Part II, Section 124 that every employer
shall ensure that the health and safety at work of every
person employed by the employer is protected. Furthermore,
Section 125(1)(z.14) of the Canada Labour Code stipulates
that the employer will take all reasonable care to ensure that
all persons granted access to the work place, other than the
employer's employees, are informed of every known or
foreseeable health and safety hazard to which they are likely
to be exposed in the work place. Also, the designated
substances report (DSR) was performed to meet the
requirements of Section 30 of the Ontario Occupational
Health and Safety Act, Revised Statutes of Ontario, 1990,
Chapter 0.1. By having a DSR conducted, the PWGSC
Departmental Representative will be able to inform his or her
employees, contractors, and tenants of any designated
substances that may be present and possibly disturbed
throughout the duration of the project. The informed
Departmental Representative will then be able to impose
appropriate health and safety precautions for all applicable
personnel as required.
.2 The designated substances identified in the
Occupational Health and Safety Act and its corresponding
regulations are:
.1
Acrylonitrile: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.2
Arsenic: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.3
Asbestos:
.1
“Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.2
“General – Waste Management”
O.Reg 347/90, as amended
.3
“Designated Substance – Asbestos
on Construction Projects and in
Buildings and Repair Operations”
O.Reg 278/05 (as amended)
.4
PWGSC Departmental Policy
DP 057 – “Asbestos Management”
.4
Benzene: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.5
Coke Oven Emissions: “Designated
Substances” O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.6
Ethylene Oxide: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
1
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 2
.7
Isocyanates: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.8
Lead:
.9
1.2
.1
“Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.2
“General – Waste Management”
O.Reg 347/90, as amended
.3
Canada Consumer Product Safety
Act’s “Surface Coating Materials
Regulations SOR/2005-109” (2011)
Mercury:
.1
“Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.2
“General – Waste Management”
O.Reg 347/90, as amended
.10
Silica: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.11
Vinyl Chloride: “Designated Substances”
O.Reg 490/09, as amended.
.3
All contractors requesting tenders from
subcontractors shall furnish this report to
subcontractors.
.1
DST Consulting Engineers Inc. (DST), conducted
the
on-site
survey
for
this
report
on
February 5, 2014. At the request of PWGSC, DST
returned to the R.H. Coates project areas on March
27, 2014 to collect additional bulk drywall joint
compound samples in order to delineate drywall
materials adjacent or in proximity to confirmed
asbestos-containing perimeter/exterior wall drywall
materials.
.2
DST staff completed a visual evaluation of building
materials in select areas of both buildings for the
presence of suspected designated substances on
February 5, 2014 and March 27, 2014. DST did not
complete a full building designated substances
survey. As such, the DSR for this project specifically
included the following floors, hereafter referred to as
‘the project areas’:
VALIDITY DATE
2
•
11th, 14th and 19th Floors of the R.H.
Coates building, located at 100 Tunney’s
Pasture Drive; and
•
7th Floor of the Jean-Talon Building, located
at 170 Tunney’s Pasture Drive.
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 3
Prior to the site survey, DST reviewed and utilized
information present in the following past designated
substance survey:
•
Designated Substances Report for the Floor
Refurbishment Project. R.H. Coates and
Jean-Talon Buildings, 100 and 170 Tunney’s
Pasture Drive, Ottawa, Ontario. Summary
Report (PN: R.065808.005). Prepared by
DST Consulting Engineers. November 18,
2013.
.1
The scope of work for this report involved a
visual inspection of building materials and
contents for the presence of suspected
designated substances within the project
areas.
.2
From the visual inspection, suspect
materials were sampled and analyzed,
(where necessary), for select designated
substances. On the basis of this inspection,
a total of thirty-nine (39) bulk asbestos
samples were collected by DST from the
R.H. Coates project areas and twenty-three
(23) bulk samples were collected from the
Jean Talon project area.
.3
Samples were then submitted for their
respective analysis at Paracel Laboratories
Ltd.,
(accredited
by
the
Canadian
Association for Laboratory Accreditation)
located at 300-2319 St. Laurent Boulevard,
Ottawa, ON K1G 4J8.
.4
The survey was limited to those areas that
could be accessed by non-destructive
means. The visual inspection and sampling
was limited to readily accessible areas.
Destructive testing was not included in the
investigation. Due to the nature of building
construction, some inherent limitations exist
as to the possible thoroughness of the
designated substance survey. The survey
did not include the demolition of floors, floor
finishes, solid ceilings or walls, or the
sampling of pipe insulations, pipe fitting
insulations and floor coverings.
.5
It is possible that designated substances are
present in non-accessible areas and
concealed spaces (i.e., wall and ceiling
cavities), or additional confined spaces. No
other areas outside the defined work
boundaries have been assessed.
.6
Prior to beginning work, it must be confirmed
with the Departmental Representative that
3
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 4
no additional designated substances have
been brought to the project area.
.7
In addition, the survey refers to
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) and
Halocarbons; however, it does not refer to
other substances that may be present in the
day-to-day usage for specialized equipment
or areas in buildings (i.e., lead shields, fume
hoods, chemicals, etc.).
.8
There is a possibility that materials that
could not be reasonably identified within the
scope of this assessment or which were not
apparent during previous site visits may
exist. Should any designated substance be
encountered in the course of demolition or
renovation, work must be stopped,
preventative measures taken, and the
Departmental Representative must be
notified immediately. Do not proceed until
written instructions have been received.
PART 2 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES
2.1
SURVEY RESULTS
.1
ACRYLONITRILE: Not Identified
.2
ARSENIC: Not Identified
.3
ASBESTOS: Identified
Asbestos is a naturally occurring material.
In
general, it has historically been intentionally added
to many building materials in the construction
industry to increase thermal or chemical resistance
properties.
More common uses are thermal
insulation for pipes and boilers, structural steelwork
fireproofing, floor tiles and in-wall and ceiling
plasters.
There are two classes of asbestoscontaining materials: friable and non-friable. Friable
asbestos-containing materials are loose in
composition or can be easily crumbled using hand
pressure. Non-friable asbestos-containing materials
are more durable and are held together by a binder
such as cement, vinyl or asphalt.
Representative bulk samples, collected from
materials located within the project areas have been
analyzed for asbestos. Analytical results indicate
that select samples contain asbestos in the project
areas.
4
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 5
Tables 1A and 1B summarize the analytical results
of bulk samples collected during the site
investigation:
Table 1A: Asbestos Sample Results by PLM – R.H. Coates Building
Sample
number
Material
Location
RHC-02A
Interior office
area, 3rd Floor
RHC-02B
RHC-02C
Plaster on
columns – white
and grey layers1
RHC-02D
Interior office area,
12th Floor
RHC-02E
Interior office area,
13th Floor
18291-01A
18291-01B
18291-01C
18291-01D
18291-01E
18291-02A
18291-02B
18291-02C
18291-03A
18291-03B
18291-03C
18291-04A
18291-04B
18291-04C
18291-05A
18291-05B
18291-05C
18291-06A
18291-06B
18291-06C
18291-06D
18291-06E
Perimeter walls,
drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 19th
Floor
Core drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 19th
Floor
Black tar
adhesive
applied to
Styrofoam
panels,
perimeter of
floor
Office Area, 19th
Floor
12”x12” Vinyl
floor tile, streaked
19th
Floor, Kitchen
Core walls,
drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 14th
Floor
Perimeter walls,
drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 14th
Floor
1
Asbestos Type
Asbestos
content (%)
Chrysotile (white layer)
3%
n/d (grey layer)
n/a
Not analyzed – positive
n/a
stop (white layer)
n/d (grey layer)
n/a
Not analyzed – positive
n/a
stop (white layer)
n/d (grey layer)
n/a
Not analyzed – positive
n/a
stop (white layer)
n/d (grey layer)
n/a
Not analyzed – positive
n/a
stop (white layer)
n/d (grey layer)
n/a
n/d
n/a
Chrysotile
1%
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
Chrysotile
10.69%
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Chrysotile
1
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Designated Substances Report for the Floor Refurbishment Project. R.H. Coates and Jean-Talon
Buildings, 100 and 170 Tunney’s Pasture Drive, Ottawa, Ontario. Summary Report (PN: R.065808.005).
Prepared by DST Consulting Engineers. November 18, 2013.
5
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Sample
number
18291-07A
18291-07B
18291-07C
18291-08A
18291-08B
18291-08C
18291-08D
18291-08E
18291-09A
18291-09B
18291-09C
18291-10A
18291-10B
18291-10C
18291-18A
18291-18B
18291-18C
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 6
Asbestos Type
Asbestos
content (%)
Material
Location
2’x4’ Ceiling Tile
14th Floor
Perimeter walls,
drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 11th
Floors
Core walls,
drywall joint
compound
Office Areas, 11th
Floor
12”x12” Vinyl
floor tiles
Kitchen, 11th Floor
n/d
n/a
Perimeter
Offices, Drywall
Joint Compound
11th Floor
14th Floor
19th Floor
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/d
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
Chrysotile
1
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
Bold items exceed the 0.5% regulated concentration of asbestos, as per O.Reg. 278/05, as amended
MDL: Method Detection Limit, n/d – none detected, n/a- not applicable
Based on analytical sampling results listed above
and limited visual observations noted during the
survey,
the
following
asbestos-containing
materials were identified in the R.H. Coates
project areas:


6
Drywall joint compound associated with
perimeter/exterior wall drywall materials
throughout the 11th, 14th and 19th Floors
contains 1% Chrysotile asbestos (Samples
18291-01B, 18291-06B, 18291-08A);
DST also collected three (3) representative
drywall joint compound samples for drywall
materials (partition walls) connected to (i.e.
butting up to/against) or in proximity to
confirmed
asbestos-containing
perimeter/exterior wall and bulkhead drywall
materials (i.e. perimeter office partitions) on
the 11th (Sample 18291-18A), 14th (Sample
18291-18B) and 19th (Sample 18291-18C)
floors. Analytical results have revealed that
these drywall materials (partition walls)
adjacent
to/connected
to
asbestoscontaining perimeter/exterior walls do not
contain asbestos. However, in cases where
these non-asbestos drywall materials
connect to or butt up against asbestoscontaining drywall materials at the
perimeter/exterior
walls,
removal
or
disturbance at these connection points
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 7



should be performed using appropriate
asbestos precautionary measures.
Non-friable black tar adhesive applied to
Styrofoam panels around the perimeters of
the 11th, 14th and 19th Floors (Sample
18291-03A) contains 10.69% Chrysotile
asbestos;
Based on historic sampling in the building as
part of a separate refit project for the 3rd,
12th and 13th Floors of the R.H Coates
building,
asbestos-containing
plaster
materials were identified at structural
columns as containing 3% Chrysotile
asbestos (Sample RHC-02A). Concealed
plaster materials may be present at
structural columns throughout the project
areas. Encountered plaster materials should
be considered asbestos containing, where
present.
Based on historic observations in the
building as part of a separate refit project for
the 3rd, 12th and 13th Floors of the R.H
Coates building, asbestos-containing pipe
fitting insulation may be present in
concealed areas of the project area,
associated with perimeter radiators.
Table 1B: Asbestos Sample Results by PLM – Jean-Talon Building
Sample
number
18291-11A
18291-11B
18291-11C
18291-11D
18291-11E
18291-12A
18291-12B
18291-12C
18291-13A
18291-13B
18291-13C
18291-14A
18291-14B
18291-14C
18291-15A
18291-15B
18291-15C
18291-16A
18291-16B
Material
Location
Perimeter walls,
drywall joint
compound
7th Floor
Grey caulking
applied to
perimeter metal
wall, above ceiling
tiles
7th Floor
2’x4’ Ceiling Tiles
7th
12”x12” Vinyl floor
tile, beige
7th Floor
Plaster
7th Floor, Core
Core columns,
drywall joint
7th Floor
Asbestos Type
Chrysotile
1
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
Not analyzed, positive stop
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
Floor
7
Asbestos
content (%)
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
n/d
n/a
Chrysotile
1
Not analyzed, positive stop
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Sample
number
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 8
Material
Location
Asbestos Type
Asbestos
content (%)
compound
18291-16C
Not analyzed, positive stop
18291-17A
n/d
n/a
Elevator Lobby, 7th
18291-17B
Stipple
n/d
n/a
Floor
18291-17C
n/d
n/a
Bold items exceed the 0.5% regulated concentration of asbestos, as per O.Reg. 278/05, as amended
MDL: Method Detection Limit, n/d – none detected, n/a- not applicable
Based on analytical sampling and limited
observations noted during the survey, the
following asbestos-containing material was
identified in the project areas of the 7th Floor of
the Jean Talon building:

Drywall joint compound associated with
perimeter and core (column) drywall
materials throughout the project area
(Samples 18291-11A and 18291-16A)
contains 1% Chrysotile asbestos.
.4
BENZENE: Not Identified
.5
COKE OVEN EMISSIONS: Not Identified
.6
ETHYLENE OXIDE: Not Identified
.7
ISOCYANATES: Not Identified
.8
LEAD: Suspected
Lead is a naturally occurring metal. It was used
primarily in paint prior to the 1980s to increase the
drying process. Lead in paint becomes a danger
when it is old or damaged, as it creates lead dust
and chips. Lead can also be found in soldered joints
installed on piping up to the mid-1990s and in older
cast iron bell and spigot joints.
.1 According to the Canada Consumer Product
Safety Act’s Surface Coating Materials
Regulations SOR/2005-109, as amended,
allowable concentration of lead of surface
coatings is 0.009 percent by weight (weight of
lead to weight of paint), which is equivalent to 90
parts per million (ppm).
.2 Even at very low concentrations, there may be
potential for exposure to very high levels of lead
depending on the activities performed that
disturb the lead-containing materials. At low
8
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 9
lead
concentrations,
conducting
a
risk
assessment to assess the potential for exposure
is required to determine the need to follow
precautionary measures.
.3 All paints were observed to be in good condition.
As such, samples of paints were not collected as
sampling without matrix interference (i.e.
removing paint without also removing non-paint
substrate) would likely prove difficult. Older
interior paint finishes throughout the project area
are
suspected
to
contain
detectable
concentrations of lead.
.4 Lead is expected to be present within solder on
copper piping throughout the project areas.
.9
MERCURY: Identified
Mercury is assumed present in vapour form and in
the phosphor coating of T-8 fluorescent light tubes
throughout the project areas.
.10
SILICA: Identified
Free crystalline silica is assumed present in
concrete, plaster, drywall, stipple, vinyl floor tiles,
and ceiling tiles throughout the project areas.
2.2
.11
VINYL CHLORIDE MONOMER: Not Identified
.12
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs): Not
Identified
.13
HALOCARBONS: Not Identified
1.
ASBESTOS
RECOMMENDATIONS
PWGSC’s Departmental Policy (DP) 057, Asbestos
Management, sets policy, establishes roles and
responsibilities and provides a code of practice for
the management of and working with asbestoscontaining materials. All work must be done in
accordance with this directive, as well as all other
applicable legislation. Disturbance of all asbestos
(whether friable or non-friable) is regulated in
Ontario by “Designated Substance – Asbestos on
Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair
Operations” O.Reg 278/05, as amended, which
outlines the precautions required when performing
work involving asbestos-containing materials. The
regulation
stipulates
appropriate
respiratory
9
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 10
protection, work procedures and ventilation
requirements that must be utilized during the
disturbance of any asbestos-containing materials, or
materials suspected to contain asbestos.
In the event of conflict between DP-057 and
“Designated Substance – Asbestos on Construction
Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations”
O.Reg. 278/05, as amended, the more stringent
shall apply.
The removal or disturbance of less than one square
metre of drywall in which the joint-filling
compound contains asbestos must be conducted
using a minimum of Type 1 asbestos work
procedures. The removal or disturbance of one
square metre or more of drywall in which the joint
filling compounds are asbestos-containing must be
conducted using a minimum Type 2 asbestos work
procedures.
Where encountered, asbestos-containing plaster is
considered a non-friable material in good condition
(i.e. intact). However, should the removal or
disturbance of the asbestos-containing plaster be
required, the material shall be treated as a friable
material, and should thus be removed in accordance
with appropriate precautionary measures stipulated
in O.Reg 278/05, as amended. The removal or
disturbance of one square metre or less of asbestos
containing plaster must be conducted using a
minimum of Type 2 asbestos work procedures. The
removal or disturbance of more than one square
metre of asbestos-containing plaster must be
conducted using Type 3 asbestos work procedures.
Should Type 3 asbestos abatement procedures be
performed in occupied federal buildings, daily
asbestos air monitoring outside of each asbestos
work area is required, as per PWGSC DP-057. Note
that it would be impractical to distinguish white from
grey layers in an abatement situation, and thus any
disturbance of this plaster as a whole should be
treated as an asbestos disturbance.
The removal or disturbance of one square metre or
less of friable asbestos containing materials, where
encountered (grey cement compound on pipe
fittings) must be conducted using a minimum of
Type 2 asbestos work procedures. The removal or
disturbance of more than one square metre of friable
asbestos-containing materials must be conducted
using Type 3 asbestos work procedures. Type 3
asbestos abatement operations performed in
occupied buildings require daily asbestos air
monitoring outside of each asbestos work area, as
per PWGSC DP-057. It should be noted that the
removal of good condition asbestos-containing pipe
insulation and pipe fitting insulation can be
10
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 11
conducted using Type 2 glove bag procedures,
provided the material is in good condition, and a
proper seal can be maintained.
The removal or disturbance of non-friable ACMs
(black tar), if disturbance is necessary, can be
conducted using a minimum of Type 1 asbestos
work procedures in accordance with O.Reg 278/05,
as amended, provided the material is wetted to
control the spread of dust or fibres, and the work is
done only by means of non-powered hand-held
tools. If these conditions cannot be met, then more
stringent (Type 2 or Type 3) work procedures are
required.
The breaking, cutting, drilling, abrading, grinding,
sanding or vibrating of non-friable ACMs (black tar at
floor/ceiling penetrations), if disturbance is
necessary, can be conducted using Type 1 asbestos
precautionary measures, provided the material is
wetted to control the spread of dust or fibres, and
the work is done only by means of non-powered
hand-held tools. If these conditions cannot be met,
than more stringent (Type 2 or Type 3) work
procedures are required.
“General – Waste Management” O.Reg 347/90, as
amended, governs the disposal of waste containing
asbestos. The waste must be disposed at a licensed
waste disposal site.
2.
LEAD
If suspected lead-containing materials are disturbed
(i.e. during dry sanding, grinding, polishing and
sawing operations), then proper precautions, as
outlined under “Designated Substances” O.Reg
490/09, as amended, of the Occupational Health
and Safety Act, must be followed.
Under Ontario Regulation 490/09, as amended of
the Occupational Health and Safety Act, regulatory
limits have been established for occupational
exposure limits to airborne lead that may be present
in a workplace.
The Time Weighted Average
Exposure Values (TWAEV) to airborne lead dust or
fumes should not exceed the Ministry of Labour’s
0.05 milligram per cubic metre (mg/m3) limit during
the removal of paints and products containing any
concentration of lead. The TWAEV represents the
time-weighted average concentration for a
conventional 8-hour workday and a 40-hour
workweek, to which it is believed that nearly all
workers may be repeatedly exposed, day after day,
without adverse health effects.
Contractors
performing
work
that
requires
disturbance of lead-containing materials are
responsible to ensure that the workers are not
11
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 12
exposed to airborne lead dust levels in excess of the
time-weighted average and Maximum Exposure
Concentration for lead-containing paints.
.1 Ontario Ministry of Labour (MoL) has published
the document entitled “Guideline: Lead on
Construction Projects”. This document classifies all
disturbances of lead-containing materials as Type 1,
Type 2a, Type 2b, Type 3a or Type 3b work, based
on presumed airborne concentrations of lead
generated during the work each of which will have
defined work practices. Although this document is
not a regulation, Ministry of Labour Inspectors use it
as guidance during site inspections. Where there is
conflict with the exposure limits and respiratory
protection required by “Designated Substances”
Regulation O.Reg 490/09, as amended, the most
stringent requirements of Regulation 490/09 must
apply
.2 The disposal of construction waste containing
lead is controlled by “General – Waste
Management” O.Reg 347/90, as amended, under
the Ontario Environmental Protection Act. The
classification of the waste is dependent upon the
result(s) of leachate test(s). The waste can be
classified as "hazardous", "non-hazardous" or
"registerable solid waste", depending on the results
of the leachate test.
Prior to disposal, the concentration of leachable lead
must be determined for waste materials with
elevated lead contents following the Toxicity
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). Lead
sheeting can be recycled as scrap metal waste.
3.
MERCURY
.1 Mercury
is
governed
by
“Designated
Substances" O.Reg 490/09, as amended, under the
Occupational Health and Safety Act. The regulation
provides requirements for allowable exposure levels.
.2 In addition, mercury waste is considered a
hazardous waste under “General – Waste
Management” O.Reg 347/90, as amended, of the
Ontario Environmental Protection Act. Fluorescent
lamp tubes are considered hazardous material and
should be recycled if removed from service. For
information regarding the collection of fluorescent
lamp tubes, please consult the PWGSC
Departmental Representative.
4.
SILICA
.1 Silica occurs as crystalline material in cement.
Crystalline silica is regulated under “Designated
Substances” O.Reg 490/09, as amended, of the
12
Project No:
R.067484.001
Rev. A.
Section 01 14 25
Designated Substances Report
Page 13
Occupational Health and Safety Act as a Designated
Substance.
.2 Silica dust can be generated through such
processes as blasting, grinding, crushing, and
sandblasting silica-containing material. Since silica
is presumed present in concrete, plaster, drywall,
stipple, vinyl floor tiles, and ceiling tiles within the
project areas, appropriate respiratory protection and
ventilation must be donned during the demolition
and modifications of these structures.
.3 The Occupational Health and Safety Branch of
the MoL has published the document entitled
“Guideline: Silica on Construction Projects”. This
document classifies the disturbance of materials
containing silica as Type 1, Type 2 or Type 3 work,
and assigns different levels of respiratory protection
and work procedures for each classification. These
work procedures should be followed when
performing work involving the disturbance of silicacontaining materials.
5.
CONTRACTORS DUTIES
The contractor must review the designated
substance report and take the necessary
precautions to protect the health and safety of the
workers and the environment. As per Section 30(4)
of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act,
the party hiring the contractor (i.e., PWGSC
Departmental Representative) shall ensure that the
contractor and subcontractor (if any) for the project
has received a copy of the designated substance
report prior to entering a binding contract for the
supply of work on the project. As per Section 27(2)
(a, b, and c) of the Ontario Occupational Health and
Safety Act, while onsite, the contractor supervisor
shall exercise every reasonable precaution for the
protection of a worker. If you have any questions
about the designated substance report, please
contact the PWGSC Departmental Representative.
The contractor shall also complete all reporting
requirements to comply with applicable regulations.
END OF SECTION
13
Project No. R.067898.002
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Part 1
General
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
Section 01 33 00
Page 1 of 5
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and
in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not
considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension
by reason of such default will be allowed.
.2
Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete.
.3
Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units.
.4
Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are
acceptable.
.5
Review submittals prior to submission to Departmental Representative. This review
represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and
that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and
Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific
project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected.
.6
Notify Departmental Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying
deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.
.7
Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated.
.8
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by
Departmental Representative's review of submittals.
.9
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved by Departmental Representative review.
.10
Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to
illustrate details of a portion of Work.
.2
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in
Province of Ontario.
.3
Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection
diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion
of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment,
indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which
adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings
and specifications.
.4
Allow 5 days for Departmental Representative's review of each submission.
.5
Adjustments made on shop drawings by Departmental Representative are not intended to
change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to
Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work.
Project No. R.067898.002
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00
Page 2 of 5
.6
Make changes in shop drawings as Departmental Representative may require, consistent
with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Departmental in writing of
revisions other than those requested.
.7
Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.8
Date.
Project title and number.
Contractor's name and address.
Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.
Other pertinent data.
Submissions include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Date and revision dates.
Project title and number.
Name and address of:
.1
Subcontractor.
.2
Supplier.
.3
Manufacturer.
Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying
approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with
Contract Documents.
Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable:
.1
Fabrication.
.2
Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and
clearances.
.3
Setting or erection details.
.4
Capacities.
.5
Performance characteristics.
.6
Standards.
.7
Operating weight.
.8
Wiring diagrams.
.9
Single line and schematic diagrams.
.10
Relationship to adjacent work.
.9
After Departmental Representative's review, distribute copies.
.10
Submit one PDF electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested in
specification Sections and as Departmental Representative may reasonably request.
.11
Submit PDF electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative
where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.
.12
Submit PDF electronic copies of test reports for requirements requested in specification
Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
.13
Section 01 33 00
Page 3 of 5
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or
system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in
accord with specified requirements.
Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.
Submit PDF electronic copy of certificates for requirements requested in specification
Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.14
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible
officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product,
system or material meets specification requirements.
Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project
name.
Submit PDF electronic copy of manufacturers instructions for requirements requested in
specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.1
Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material,
including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning
impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
.15
Submit PDF electronic copy of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested
in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.16
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's
representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.
.17
Submit PDF electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.18
Delete information not applicable to project.
.19
Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.
.20
If upon review by Departmental Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or
if only minor corrections are made, reviewed marked-up PDF files will be returned and
fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted
copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same
procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work
may proceed.
.21
The review of shop drawings by Public Works and Government Services Canada
(PWGSC) is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept.
.1
.2
.22
This review shall not mean that PWGSC approves detail design inherent in shop
drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same,
and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of
construction and Contract Documents.
Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for
dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that
pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and
installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.
Provide paper copies of submittals as requested by Departmental Representative.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00
Page 4 of 5
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections.
Label samples with origin and intended use.
.2
Deliver samples prepaid to address(es) provided by Departmental Representative.
.3
Notify Departmental Representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in
samples from requirements of Contract Documents.
.4
Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.
.5
Adjustments made on samples by Departmental Representative are not intended to
change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to
Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work.
.6
Make changes in samples which Departmental Representative may require, consistent
with Contract Documents.
.7
Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material
against which installed Work will be verified.
1.4
MOCK-UPS
.1
1.5
Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
.1
Submit electronic and hard copy of colour digital photography in jpg format, fine
resolution, minimum weekly and as directed by Departmental Representative
.2
Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated.
.3
Number of viewpoints:
.1
.4
Frequency of photographic documentation: weekly and as directed by Departmental
Representative.
.1
1.6
Viewpoints and their location as determined by Departmental Representative
Upon completion of: framing and services before concealment, and as directed
by Departmental Representative.
CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS
.1
Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Compensation Board status.
.2
Submit transcription of insurance immediately after award of Contract.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 33 00
Page 5 of 5
Project No. R.067898.002
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29.06
Page 1 of 3
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Occupational Health and Safety Act R.S.O. 1990, c. 0.1, and Regulations for
Construction Projects O. Reg. 213/91, current edition.
.2
CAN/CSA, Z462-12 (Workplace Electrical Safety Standard)
.3
CAN/CSA-Z460-05 (R2010) - Control of Hazardous Energy.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within seven (7) working days after date of
Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must
include:
.1
Results of site specific safety hazard assessment.
.2
Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation
found in work plan.
.3
Written safe work procedures to address the known hazards.
.3
Submit three (3) copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and
safety inspection reports to Departmental Representative, weekly.
.4
Submit copies of reports or directions issued by Federal and Provincial health and safety
inspectors.
.5
Submit copies of incident and accident reports within 24 hours after the event.
.6
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets to Departmental Representative.
.7
Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety
Plan and provide comments to Contractor within seven (7) working days after receipt of
plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within
seven (7) working days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative.
.8
Departmental Representative's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should
not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility
for construction Health and Safety.
.9
On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: address standard operating
procedures to be implemented during emergency situations.
1.3
FILING OF NOTICE
.1
1.4
File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to beginning of Work.
SAFETY ASSESSMENT
.1
Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29.06
Page 2 of 3
MEETINGS
.1
1.6
Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Departmental Representative
prior to commencement of Work.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to
beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final
demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.
.2
Departmental Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are
noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns.
1.7
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Be responsible and assume the role of "Constructor" as described in the Ontario
Occupational Health & Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects."
.2
Assume responsibility for health and safety of all other contractors present on site under
the prescriptions of the present section.
.3
Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract
Documents, applicable federal, provincial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances,
and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.
1.8
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. 0.1.
.2
Comply with the Ontario Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91.
.3
Comply with CAN/CSA, Z462-12 (Workplace Electrical Safety Standard)
.4
Comply with CAN/CSA-Z460-05 (R2010) - Control of Hazardous Energy.
1.9
UNFORSEEN HAZARDS
.1
1.10
When unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition occur during
performance of Work, follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work
in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction and advise
Departmental Representative verbally and in writing.
HEALTH AND SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR
.1
Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health and
Safety Co-ordinator. Health and Safety Co-ordinator must:
.1
Have site-related working experience specific to activities associated with
specified Work. Submit relevant experience to Departmental Representative.
.2
Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.11
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29.06
Page 3 of 3
.3
Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions
and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not
permitted to enter site to perform Work.
.4
Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific
Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.
.5
Be on site during execution of Work.
POSTING OF DOCUMENTS
.1
1.12
Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on
site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction, and in
consultation with Departmental Representative.
CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
.1
Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority
having jurisdiction or by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide Departmental Representative with written report of action taken to correct noncompliance of health and safety issues identified.
.3
Departmental Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety
regulations is not corrected.
1.13
BLASTING
.1
1.14
Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.
POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES
.1
1.15
Use powder actuated devices only after receipt of written permission from Departmental
Representative.
WORK STOPPAGE
.1
Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of
environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 1
General
1.1
INSPECTION
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00
Page 1 of 3
.1
Allow Departmental Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at
locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.
.2
Give timely notice requesting inspection, minimum 5 days, if Work is designated for
special tests, inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or
law of Place of Work.
.3
If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special
tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections
or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.
.4
Departmental Representative will order part of Work to be examined if Work is
suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such
work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay
cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract
Documents, Departmental Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.
1.2
INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES
.1
Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Departmental
Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Cost of such
services will be borne by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.
.3
Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work
in accordance with Contract Documents.
.4
If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request
additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and
irregularities as advised by Departmental Representative at no cost to Departmental
Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.
1.3
ACCESS TO WORK
.1
Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication
plants.
.2
Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.
1.4
PROCEDURES
.1
Notify appropriate agency and Departmental Representative in advance of requirement
for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.
.2
Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in
specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence to not cause
delays in Work.
.3
Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide
sufficient space to store and cure test samples.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00
Page 2 of 3
REJECTED WORK
.1
Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products
or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by
Departmental Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or reexecute in accordance with Contract Documents.
.2
Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements
promptly.
.3
If in opinion of Departmental Representative, it is not expedient to correct defective
Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental
Representative will deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work
performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which will be
determined by Departmental Representative.
1.6
REPORTS
.1
Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide copies to subcontractor of work being inspected or tested manufacturer or
fabricator of material being inspected or tested.
1.7
TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS
.1
Furnish test results and mix designs as requested.
.2
Cost of tests beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by
law of Place of Work will be appraised by Departmental Representative and may be
authorized as recoverable.
1.8
MOCK-UPS
.1
Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of
Sections required to provide mock-ups.
.2
Construct in locations as specified in specific Section acceptable to Departmental
Representative.
.3
Prepare mock-ups for Departmental Representative with reasonable promptness and in
orderly sequence, to not cause delays in Work.
.4
Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for
extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be
allowed.
.5
If requested, Departmental Representative will assist in preparing schedule fixing dates
for preparation.
.6
Mock-ups may remain as part of Work at the discretion of the Departmental
Representative.
1.9
MILL TESTS
.1
Submit mill test certificates as requested.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.10
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00
Page 3 of 3
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building
equipment systems.
.2
Refer to Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (CX) Requirements for definitive
requirements.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
General
1.1
REFERENCES
Section 01 61 00
Page 1 of 4
.1
Conform to reference standards in whole or in part as specifically requested in
specifications.
.2
If there is question as to whether products or systems are in conformance with applicable
standards, Departmental Representative reserves right to have such products or systems
tested to prove or disprove conformance.
.3
Cost for such testing will be born by Departmental Representative in event of
conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.
1.2
QUALITY
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles incorporated in Work shall be new, not
damaged or defective, and of best quality for purpose intended. If requested, furnish
evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.2
Procurement policy is to acquire, in cost effective manner, items containing highest
percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining
satisfactory levels of competition. Make reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered
materials and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in execution of
work.
.3
Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected,
regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is
precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own
expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
.4
Should disputes arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with
Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents.
.5
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any
particular or like item throughout building.
.6
Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in
prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in
mechanical or electrical rooms.
1.3
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and
soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.
.2
Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with
manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until
required in Work.
.3
Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
.5
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden
platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 2 of 4
.6
Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to
shed moisture.
.7
Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent
spontaneous combustion.
.8
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of
Departmental Representative.
.9
Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental Representative's
satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
1.4
TRANSPORTATION
.1
Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.
.2
Transportation cost of products supplied by Departmental Representative will be paid for
by Departmental Representative. Unload, handle and store such products.
1.5
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products.
Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2
Notify Departmental Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and
manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental Representative will establish course of
action.
.3
Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these
requirements, authorizes Departmental Representative to require removal and reinstallation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.
1.6
QUALITY OF WORK
.1
Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and
skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify
Departmental Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to
produce required results.
.2
Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Departmental Representative
reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.
.3
Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with
Departmental Representative, whose decision is final.
1.7
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Ensure co-operation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous
supervision.
.2
Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.
1.8
CONCEALMENT
.1
In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except
where indicated otherwise.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
1.9
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 3 of 4
Before installation inform Departmental Representative if there is interference. Install as
directed by Departmental Representative.
REMEDIAL WORK
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified
as defective or unacceptable. Co-ordinate adjacent affected Work as required.
.2
Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a
manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.
1.10
LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as
approximate and subject to relocation prior to installation within a radius of up to
3000mm from the location shown to suit site conditions, interferences or other conditions
determined by the Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.
1.11
FASTENINGS
.1
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent
materials, unless indicated otherwise.
.2
Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.
.3
Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior
work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected
specification Section.
.4
Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide
positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not
acceptable.
.5
Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.
.6
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are
not acceptable.
1.12
FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT
.1
Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable
for service.
.2
Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304
stainless steel for exterior areas.
.3
Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.
.4
Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers
where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.
1.13
PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
.1
Prevent overloading of parts of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve load bearing structural
member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental
Representative.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.14
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 4 of 4
EXISTING UTILITIES
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times
directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, and/or
building occupants.
.2
Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap
off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Record location of capped
service.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
EXECUTION
Part 1
General
1.1
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
Structural integrity of elements of project.
Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements.
Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
Work of Departmental Representative or separate contractor.
Include in request:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.2
Section 01 73 00
Page 1 of 3
Identification of project.
Location and description of affected Work.
Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.
Description of proposed Work, and products to be used.
Alternatives to cutting and patching.
Effect on Work of Departmental Representative or separate contractor.
Written permission of affected separate contractor.
Date and time work will be executed.
MATERIALS
.1
Required for original installation.
.2
Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00
- Submittal Procedures.
1.3
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during
cutting and patching.
.2
After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.
.3
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
.4
Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and
methods to protect other portions of project from damage.
.5
Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work;
maintain excavations free of water.
1.4
EXECUTION
.1
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.
.2
Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.
.3
Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.
Project No. R.067898.002
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00
Page 2 of 3
.4
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.
.5
Remove samples of installed Work for testing.
.6
Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and
electrical Work.
.7
Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
.8
Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and
moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.
.9
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not
allowed on masonry work without prior approval.
.10
Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
.11
Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces.
.12
At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with
firestopping material in accordance with ULC listed firestop assemblies applicable for the
existing construction. provide submittals for proposed firestop assemblies prior to
installation for approval by Departmental Representative.
.13
Patch and make good existing construction that is cut, damaged or disturbed in the course
of the Work, to Departmental Representative’s approval. Match existing material and
finish texture, appearance and colour.
.14
Remove all traces of existing construction removed in the course of the Work.
.15
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest
intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit.
.16
Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas
except where indicated otherwise.
.17
At penetration of acoustically-rated partitions, completely seal voids with acoustic sealant
on both sides of partition.
1.5
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse/recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 73 00
Page 3 of 3
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 1 of 10
Part 1
General
1.1
WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS
.1
Prior to start of Work conduct meeting with Departmental Representative to review and
discuss PWGSC's waste management goal and Contractor's proposed Waste Reduction
Workplan for Construction, Renovation and /or Demolition (CRD) waste to be project
generated.
.2
PWGSC's waste management goal: to divert a minimum 75 percent of total Project Waste
from landfill sites. Prior to project completion provide Departmental Representative
documentation certifying that waste management, recycling, reuse of recyclable and
reusable materials have been extensively practiced. The overall waste diversion goal for
this project is 75%..
.3
Minimize amount of non-hazardous solid waste generated by project and accomplish
maximum source reduction, reuse and recycling of solid waste produced by CRD
activities.
.4
Protect environment and prevent environmental pollution damage.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Approved/Authorized recycling facility: waste recycler approved by applicable
provincial authority or other users of material for recycling approved by the
Departmental Representative.
Class III: non-hazardous waste - construction renovation and demolition waste.
Construction, Renovation and/or Demolition (CRD) Waste: Class III solid, nonhazardous waste materials generated during construction, demolition, and/or
renovation activities
Cost/Revenue Analysis Workplan (CRAW): based on information from Waste
Reduction Workplan, and intended as financial tracking tool for determining
economic status of waste management practices (Schedule E).
Inert Fill: inert waste - exclusively asphalt and concrete.
Waste Source Separation Program (WSSP): implementation and co-ordination of
ongoing activities to ensure designated waste materials will be sorted into predefined categories and sent for recycling and reuse, maximizing diversion and
potential to reduce disposal costs.
Recyclable: ability of product or material to be recovered at end of its life cycle
and re-manufactured into new product for reuse.
Recycle: process by which waste and recyclable materials are transformed or
collected for purpose of being transferred into new products.
Recycling: process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste
and other discarded materials for purpose of using in altered form. Recycling
does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.
Reuse: repeated use of product in same form but not necessarily for same
purpose. Reuse includes:
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 2 of 10
.1
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.2
Salvaging reusable materials from re-modelling projects, before
demolition stage, for resale, reuse on current project or for storage for
use on future projects.
.2
Returning reusable items including pallets or unused products to vendors.
Salvage: removal of structural and non-structural materials from
deconstruction/disassembly projects for purpose of reuse or recycling.
Separate Condition: refers to waste sorted into individual types.
Source Separation: act of keeping different types of waste materials separate
beginning from the point they became waste.
Waste Audit (WA): detailed inventory of estimated quantities of waste materials
that will be generated during construction, demolition, deconstruction and/or
renovation. Involves quantifying by volume/weight amounts of materials and
wastes that will be reused, recycled or landfilled. Refer to Schedule A.
Waste Diversion Report: detailed report of final results, quantifying cumulative
weights and percentages of waste materials reused, recycled and landfilled over
course of project. Measures success against Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW)
goals and identifies lessons learned.
Waste Management Co-ordinator (WMC) : contractor representative responsible
for supervising waste management activities as well as co-ordinating required
submittal and reporting requirements.
Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW): written report which addresses
opportunities for reduction, reuse, or recycling of materials generated by project.
Specifies diversion goals, implementation and reporting procedures, anticipated
results and responsibilities. Waste Reduction Workplan (Schedule B)
information acquired from Waste Audit.
Reference Standards:
.1
Ontario Ministry of Environment
.1
Ontario 3 R's Regulations (regulation 102/94) for waste management
programs applicable to construction and demolition projects greater than
2,000 m2.
.2
Ontario Environmental Protection Act (EPA)
.1
Regulation 102/94, Waste Audits and Waste Reduction
Workplans.
.2
Regulation 103/94, Source Separation Programs.
.3
Canadian Construction Association (CCA)
.1
CCA 81-2001: A Best Practices Guide to Solid Waste
Reduction.
.4
Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC)
.1
2002 National Construction, Renovation and Demolition NonHazardous Solid Waste Management Protocol.
.2
CRD Waste Management Market Research Report (available
from PWGSC's Environmental Services).
.3
Sustainable Development Strategy 2007-2009: Target 2.1
Environmentally Sustainable Use of Natural Resources.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 3 of 10
.1
.2
1.3
Real Property projects over $1 million and in
communities where industrial recycling is supported,
implementation of CRD waste management practices
will be completed, with waste materials being reused or
recycled.
Contractually ensure resources used in construction or
maintenance are consumed and recovered in a
sustainable manner.
DOCUMENTS
.1
Post and maintain in visible and accessible area at job site, one copy of following
documents:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.4
Waste Audit (Schedule A).
Waste Reduction Workplan (Schedule B).
Waste Source Separation Program.
Schedules A and B completed for project.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Prepare and submit following prior to project start-up:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
Prepare and submit on monthly basis, throughout project or at intervals agreed to by
Departmental Representative the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1 copy and 1 electronic copy of completed Waste Audit (WA): Schedule A.
1 copy and 1 electronic copy of completed Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW):
Schedule B.
1 copy and 1 electronic copy of Cost/Revenue Analysis Workplan (CRAW):
Schedule E.
1 copy and 1 electronic copy of Waste Source Separation Program (WSSP).
Receipts, scale tickets, waybills, and/or waste disposal receipts that show
quantities and types of materials reused, recycled, or disposed of.
Updated Waste Materials Tracking form (Schedule D).
Written bi-weekly monthly summary report detailing cumulative amounts of
waste materials reused, recycled and landfilled, and brief status of ongoing waste
management activities.
Submit prior to final payment the following:
.1
.2
Waste Diversion Report, indicating final quantities in tones by material types
salvaged for reuse, recycling or disposal in landfill and recycling centres, re-use
depots, landfills and other waste processors that received waste materials (See
Schedule C).
Provide receipts, scale tickets, waybills, waste disposal receipts that confirm
quantities and types of materials reused, recycled or disposed of and destination.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 4 of 10
1.5
WASTE AUDIT (WA)
.1
Departmental Representative will prepare WA prior to project start-up. WA will be
provided with bid documentation (see Schedule A).
.2
WA provides detailed inventory, estimated quantities and types of waste materials that
will be generated as well as their potential to be reused and/or recycled and project's
waste diversion goals and objectives.
.3
After award of contract, contractor to review WA and confirm that anticipated quantities
of waste generated are accurate and goals achievable.
.4
If after review, contractor determines that indicated quantities or opportunities in WA are
not accurate or achievable, contractor to provide written details of discrepancies and
revised quantities for areas of concern. Contractor to meet with Departmental
Representative to review and justify revisions.
.5
Post on-site WA where contractor and sub-contractors are able to review content.
1.6
WASTE REDUCTION WORKPLAN (WRW)
.1
Prepare and submit WRW (Schedule B) at least 5 days prior to project start-up.
.2
WRW identifies strategies to optimize diversion through reduction, reuse, and recycling
of materials and comply with applicable regulations, based on information acquired from
WA.
.3
WRW should include but not limited to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
Applicable regulations.
Specific goals for waste reduction, identify existing barriers and develop
strategies to overcome them.
Destination of materials identified.
Deconstruction/disassembly techniques and schedules.
Methods to collect, separate, and reduce generated wastes.
Location of waste bins on-site.
Security of on-site stock piles and waste bins.
Protection of personnel, sub-contractors.
Clear labelling of storage areas.
Training plan for contractor and sub-contractors.
Methods to track and report results reliably (Schedule D).
Details on materials handling and removal procedures.
Recycler and reclaimer requirements.
Quantities of materials to be salvaged for reuse or recycled and materials sent to
landfill.
Requirements for monitoring on-site wastes management activities.
.4
Structure WRW to prioritize actions and follow 3R's hierarchy, with Reduction as first
priority, followed by Reuse, then Recycle.
.5
Post WRW or summary where workers at site are able to review content.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 5 of 10
.6
1.7
Monitor and report on waste reduction by documenting total volume (in tonnes) and cost
of actual waste removed from project (Schedule D).
COST/REVENUE ANALYSIS WORKPLAN (CRAW)
.1
Prepare CRAW (see Schedule E) and include the following:
.1
.2
.3
1.8
Cost of current waste management practices.
Implementation cost of waste diversion program.
Savings and benefits resulting from waste diversion program.
WASTE SOURCE SEPARATION PROGRAM (WSSP)
.1
As part of Waste Reduction Workplan, prepare WSSP prior to project start-up.
.2
WSSP will detail methodology and planned on-site activities for separation of reusable
and recyclable materials from waste intended for landfill.
.3
Provide list and drawings of locations that will be made available for sorting, collection,
handling and storage of anticipated quantities of reusable and recyclable materials.
.4
Provide sufficient on-site facilities and containers for collection, handling, and storage of
anticipated quantities of reusable and recyclable materials.
.5
Locate containers to facilitate deposit of materials without hindering daily operations.
.6
Provide training for workers in handling and separation of materials for reuse and/or
recycling.
.7
Locate separated materials in areas which minimizes material damage.
.8
Clearly and securely label containers to identify types/conditions of materials accepted
and assist workers in separating materials accordingly.
.9
Monitor on-site waste management activities by conducting periodic site inspections to
verify: state of signage, contamination levels, bin locations and condition, personnel
participation, use of waste tracking forms and collection of waybills, receipts and
invoices.
.10
On-site sale of salvaged materials is not permitted unless authorized in writing by
Departmental Representative and provided that site safety regulations and security
requirements are adhered to.
1.9
USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES
.1
Execute Work with minimal interference and disturbance to normal use of premises.
.2
Maintain security measures established by facility and provide temporary security
measures approved by Departmental Representative.
1.10
WASTE PROCESSING SITES
.1
Contractor is responsible to research and locate waste diversion resources and service
providers. Salvaged materials are to be transported off site to approved and/or authorized
recycling facilities or to users of material for recycling.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 6 of 10
1.11
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
After award of Contract, a mandatory site examination will be held for this Project for
Contractor and sub-contractors responsible for construction, renovation
demolition/deconstruction waste management.
.1
.2
1.12
Date, time and location will be arranged by Departmental Representative
Waste Management Meeting: Waste Management Co-ordinator is to provide an update
on status of waste diversion and management activities at each meeting. Written
monthly Waste Diversion Report summary to be provided by Waste Management
Coordinator (refer to the Waste Diversion Report form in Schedule C and Waste
Materials Tracking form in Schedule D).
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Store, materials to be reused, recycled and salvaged in locations as directed by
Departmental Representative.
.2
Unless specified otherwise, materials for removal become Contractor's property.
.3
Protect, stockpile, store and catalogue salvaged items.
.4
Separate non-salvageable materials from salvaged items. Transport and deliver nonsalvageable items to licensed disposal facility.
.5
Protect structural components not removed and salvaged materials from movement or
damage.
.6
Support affected structures. If safety of building is endangered, cease operations and
immediately notify Departmental Representative
.7
Protect surface drainage, mechanical and electrical from damage and blockage.
.8
Provide on-site facilities and containers for collection and storage of reusable and
recyclable materials.
.9
Separate and store materials produced during project in designated areas.
.10
Prevent contamination of materials to be salvaged and recycled and handle materials in
accordance with requirements for acceptance by designated processing facilities.
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.13
On-site source separation is recommended.
Remove co-mingled materials to off site processing facility for separation.
Obtain waybills, receipts and/or scale tickets for separated materials removed
from site.
Materials reused on-site are considered to be diverted from landfill and as such
are to be included in all reporting.
DISPOSAL OF WASTES
.1
Do not bury rubbish or waste materials.
.2
Do not dispose of waste volatile materials mineral spirits oil paint thinner into waterways,
storm, or sanitary sewers.
.3
Keep records of construction waste including:
.1
Number and size of bins.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 7 of 10
.2
.3
.4
.5
Waste type of each bin.
Total tonnage generated.
Tonnage reused or recycled.
Reused or recycled waste destination.
.4
Remove materials on-site as Work progresses.
.5
Prepare project summary to verify destination and quantities on a material-by-material
basis as identified in the waste audit.
1.14
SCHEDULING
.1
Co-ordinate Work with other activities at site to ensure timely and orderly progress of
Work.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
Do Work in compliance with WRW and WSSP.
.2
Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled in accordance with appropriate
regulations and codes.
3.2
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
.2
3.3
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
Source separate materials to be reused/recycled into specified sort areas.
DIVERSION OF MATERIALS
.1
From following list, separate materials from general waste stream and stockpile in
separate piles or containers, as reviewed by Departmental Representative, and consistent
with applicable fire regulations.
.1
.2
Mark containers or stockpile areas.
Provide instruction on disposal practices.
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 8 of 10
.2
3.4
On-site sale of salvaged recovered, reusable, recyclable, materials is not permitted.
WASTE DIVERSION REPORT
.1
At completion of Project, prepare written Waste Diversion Report indicating quantities
of materials reused, recycled or disposed of as well as the following:
.1
.2
3.5
Identify final diversion results and measure success against goals from Waste
Reduction Workplan.
Compare final quantities/percentages diverted with initial projections in Waste
Audit and Waste Reduction Workplan and explain variances.
.1
Supporting documentation.
.2
Waybills and tracking forms.
.3
Description of issues, resolutions and lessons learned.
WASTE AUDIT (WA)
.1
(1) Material
Category
Schedule A - Waste Audit (WA)
(2) Material
Quantity
Unit
(3)
Estimated
Waste %
(4) Total
Quantity of
Waste (unit)
(5)
Generation
Point
(6) %
Recycled
(7) % Reused
Wood and
Plastics
Material
Description
Off-cuts
Warped
Pallet Forms
Plastic
Packaging
Cardboard
Packaging
Other
Doors and
Windows
Material
Description
Painted
Frames
Glass
Wood
Metal
Other
3.6
WASTE REDUCTION WORKPLAN (WRW)
.1
(1)
Material
Schedule B
(2)
Person(s)
(3) Total
Quantity
(4)
Reused
Actual
(5)
Recycled
Actual
(6)
Material(s)
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 9 of 10
Category
Responsible
of Waste
(unit)
Amount
(units)
Projected
Amount
(unit)
Projected
Destination
Wood and
Plastics
Material
Description
Chutes
Warped
Pallet
Forms
Plastic
Packag ing
Cardboard
Packag ing
Other
Doors and
Windows
Material
Description
Painted
Frames
Glass
Wood
Metal
Other
3.7
COST/REVENUE ANALYSIS WORKPLAN (CRAW)
.1
(1) Material
Description
Wood
Wood Stud
Plywood
Baseboard Wood
Door Trim Wood
Cabinet
Doors and
Windows
Panel Regular
Slab Regular
Wood
Laminate
Schedule E - Cost/Revenue Analysis Workplan (CRAW)
(2) Total
Quantity (unit)
(3) Volume
(cum)
(4) Weight
(cum)
(5) Disposal
Cost/Credit
$(+/-)
(6) Category
Sub-Total $(+/)
Project No. R.067898.002CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Section 01 74 21
AND DISPOSAL
Page 10 of 10
Byfold - Closet
Glazing
Metal Studs
and Framing
(7) Cost (-) /
Revenue (+)
3.8
CANADIAN GOVERNMENTAL DEPARTMENTS CHIEF RESPONSIBILITY
FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
.1
Schedule G - Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment:
Province
Ontario
3.9
Address
Ministry of
Environment and
Energy, 135 St. Clair
Avenue West Toronto
ON M4V 1P5
Environment Canada
Toronto ON
General Inquires
416-323-4321 800-5654923
Fax
416-323-4682
416-734-4494
SCHEDULES
.1
Following Schedules are attached to this Specification:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Waste Audit - Schedule A.
Waste Reduction Workplan Form - Schedule B.
Cost/Revenue Analysis Workplan - Schedule E.
Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment – Schedule G
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 1 of 7
Part 1
General
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Departmental Representative to establish communication procedures for:
.1
Notifying construction warranty defects.
.2
Determine priorities for type of defects.
.3
Determine reasonable response time.
.2
Contact information for bonded and licensed company for warranty work action:
provide name, telephone number and address of company authorized for
construction warranty work action.
.3
Ensure contact is located within local service area of warranted construction, is
continuously available, and is responsive to inquiries for warranty work action.
1.2
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Departmental
Representative, four final copies of operating and maintenance manuals in English and
French.
.3
Provide spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools of same quality and
manufacture as products provided in Work.
.4
Provide evidence, if requested, for type, source and quality of products supplied.
1.3
FORMAT
.1
Organize data as instructional manual.
.2
Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face
pockets.
.3
When multiple binders are used correlate data into related consistent groupings.
.1
Identify contents of each binder on spine.
.4
Cover: identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title
of project and identify subject matter of contents.
.5
Arrange content by systems, process flow, under Section numbers and sequence of Table
of Contents.
.6
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
.7
Text: manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.
.8
Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab.
.1
.9
Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
Provide 1:1 scaled CAD files in dwg format on CD.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 2 of 7
CONTENTS - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
.1
Table of Contents for Each Volume: provide title of project;
.1
.2
.3
.2
Date of submission; names.
Addresses, and telephone numbers of Consultant and Contractor with name of
responsible parties.
Schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.
For each product or system:
.1
List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers,
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
.3
Product Data: mark each sheet to identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
.4
Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.
.5
Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data.
.1
.6
1.5
Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating
manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
Training: provide training as required by Departmental Representative.
AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
.1
Maintain, in addition to requirements in General Conditions, at site for Departmental
Representative one record copy of:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.2
Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction.
.1
.3
Provide files, racks, and secure storage.
Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of
Contents of this Project Manual.
.1
.4
Contract Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Site Instructions
Change Orders and other modifications to Contract.
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
Field test records.
Inspection certificates.
Manufacturer's certificates.
Site Instructions
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.
Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition.
.1
Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 3 of 7
Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Departmental
Representative.
RECORDING INFORMATION ON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
.1
Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and in copy of Project Manual,
provided by Departmental Representative.
.2
Use felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for
recording information.
.3
Record information concurrently with construction progress.
.1
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings: mark each item to record actual construction,
including:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.5
Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible
and accessible features of construction.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes made by change orders.
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
References to related shop drawings and modifications.
Specifications: mark each item to record actual construction, including:
.1
.2
Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
Changes made by Addenda and change orders.
.6
Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field
test records, required by individual specifications sections.
.7
Provide digital photos, if requested, for site records.
1.7
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Obtain MMS data forms from Departmental Representative and fill in all information for
all new and removed equipment. Forward all maintenance data for inclusion in
Preventative Maintenance Support System (PMSS). Obtain equipment tag info from
Departmental Representative and include on P-touch label. Provide copies of all MMS
data forms in operating and maintenance manuals.
.2
For each item of equipment and each system include description of unit or system, and
component parts.
.1
.2
Give function, normal operation characteristics and limiting conditions.
Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
.3
Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
.4
Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 4 of 7
Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences.
.1
.2
Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
.6
Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing,
and checking instructions.
.7
Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
.8
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
.9
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
.10
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
.11
Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
.12
Provide Contractor's co-ordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping
diagrams.
.13
Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
.14
Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
.15
Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and
01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.
.16
Additional requirements: as specified in individual specification sections.
1.8
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
.1
Building products, applied materials, and finishes: include product data, with catalogue
number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations.
.1
Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
.2
Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and
methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.3
Moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.4
Additional requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.
1.9
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Spare Parts:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
Deliver to location as directed; place and store.
Receive and catalogue items.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative..
.2
Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.
Receive and catalogue items.
.1
Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative
.2
Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
Special Tools:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.10
Section 01 78 00
Page 5 of 7
Extra Stock Materials:
.1
.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.
Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.
Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.
Receive and catalogue items.
.1
Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative
.2
Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage
or deterioration.
.2
Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.
.3
Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.
.5
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and for review by Departmental
Representative.
1.11
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
.1
Develop warranty management plan to contain information relevant to Warranties.
.2
Submit warranty management plan, 30 days before planned pre-warranty conference, to
Departmental Representative approval.
.3
Warranty management plan to include required actions and documents to assure that
Departmental Representative receives warranties to which it is entitled.
.4
Provide plan in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to make it suitable for use by
future maintenance and repair personnel.
.5
Submit, warranty information made available during construction phase, to Departmental
Representative for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.
Project No. R.067898.002
.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 6 of 7
Assemble approved information in binder, submit upon acceptance of work and organize
binder as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents
listing.
List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and
telephone number of responsible principal.
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work.
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are
notarized.
Co-execute submittals when required.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
.7
Except for items put into use with Departmental Representative’s permission, leave date
of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Performance is determined.
.8
Conduct joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection, measured from time of
acceptance, by Departmental Representative.
.9
Include information contained in warranty management plan as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Roles and responsibilities of personnel associated with warranty process,
including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of
Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.
Listing and status of delivery of Certificates of Warranty for extended warranty
items, to include HVAC balancing, pumps, motors, transformers, commissioned
systems fire protection, alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems,.
Provide list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or
system indicating:
.1
Name of item.
.2
Model and serial numbers.
.3
Location where installed.
.4
Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
.5
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
.6
Warranties and terms of warranty: include one-year overall warranty of
construction. Indicate items that have extended warranties and show
separate warranty expiration dates.
.7
Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
.8
Starting point and duration of warranty period.
.9
Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue warranty in
force.
.10
Cross-Reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
.11
Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty
service.
Project No. R.067898.002
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 7 of 7
.12
.4
.5
.6
Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted
equipment.
Contractor's plans for attendance at 4 and 9 month post-construction warranty
inspections.
Procedure and status of tagging of equipment covered by extended warranties.
Post copies of instructions near selected pieces of equipment where operation is
critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
.10
Respond in timely manner to oral or written notification of required construction
warranty repair work.
.11
Written verification to follow oral instructions.
.1
1.12
Failure to respond will be cause for the Departmental Representative to proceed
with action against Contractor.
WARRANTY TAGS
.1
Tag, at time of installation, each warranted item. Provide durable, oil and water resistant
tag approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
Attach tags with copper wire and spray with waterproof silicone coating.
.3
Leave date of acceptance until project is accepted for occupancy.
.4
Indicate following information on tag:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Type of product/material.
Model number.
Serial number.
Contract number.
Warranty period.
Inspector's signature.
Construction Contractor.
Part 2
Products
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
General requirements relating to commissioning of project's components and systems, specifying general
requirements to PV of components, equipment, sub-systems, systems, and integrated systems.
.2
Acronyms:
.1
AFD - Alternate Forms of Delivery, service provider.
.2
BMM - Building Management Manual.
.3
Cx - Commissioning.
.4
EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems.
.5
O&M - Operation and Maintenance.
.6
PI - Product Information.
.7
PV - Performance Verification.
.8
TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
.9
PMSS - Preventative Maintenance Support System.
.10 MMS - Maintenance Management System.
GENERAL
.1
Cx is a planned program of tests, procedures and checks carried out systematically on systems and integrated
systems of the finished Project. Cx is performed after systems and integrated systems are completely installed,
functional and Contractor's Performance Verification responsibilities have been completed and approved.
Objectives:
.1
Verify installed equipment, systems and integrated systems operate in accordance with contract
documents and design criteria and intent.
.2
Ensure appropriate documentation is compiled into the BMM.
.3
Effectively train O&M staff.
.2
Contractor assists in Cx process, operating equipment and systems, troubleshooting and making adjustments
as required.
.1
Systems to be operated at full capacity under various modes to determine if they function correctly and
consistently at peak efficiency. Systems to be interactively with each other as intended in accordance
with Contract Documents and design criteria.
.2
During these checks, adjustments to be made to enhance performance to meet environmental or user
requirements.
.3
Design Criteria: as per Department Representative's requirements. To meet Project functional and operational
requirements.
COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW
.1
Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan.
.2
Cx to be a line item of Contractor's cost breakdown.
.3
Cx activities supplement field quality and testing procedures described in relevant technical sections.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.4
1.5
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 2
.4
Cx is conducted in concert with activities performed during stage of project delivery. Cx identifies issues in
Planning and Design stages which are addressed during Construction and Cx stages to ensure the built facility is
constructed and proven to operate satisfactorily under weather, environmental and occupancy conditions to
meet functional and operational requirements. Cx activities includes transfer of critical knowledge to facility
operational personnel.
.5
Departmental Representative will issue Interim Acceptance Certificate when:
.1
Completed Cx documentation has been received, reviewed for suitability and approved by Departmental
Representative.
.2
Equipment, components and systems have been commissioned.
.3
O&M training has been completed.
NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Should equipment, system components, and associated controls be incorrectly installed or malfunction during
Cx, correct deficiencies, re-verify equipment and components within the unfunctional system, including related
systems as deemed required by Departmental Representative, to ensure effective performance.
.2
Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, to determine acceptability and proper performance of
such items to be borne by Contractor. Above costs to be in form of progress payment reductions or hold-back
assessments.
PRE-CX REVIEW
.1
Before Construction:
.1
Review contract documents, confirm by writing to Departmental Representative.
.1
Adequacy of provisions for Cx.
.2
Aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of Cx.
.2
During Construction:
.1
Co-ordinate provision, location and installation of provisions for Cx.
.3
Before start of Cx:
.1
Have completed Cx Plan up-to-date.
.2
Ensure installation of related components, equipment, sub-systems, systems is complete.
.3
Fully understand Cx requirements and procedures.
.4
Have Cx documentation shelf-ready.
.5
Understand completely design criteria and intent and special features.
.6
Submit complete start-up documentation to Departmental Representative.
.7
Have Cx schedules up-to-date.
.8
Ensure systems have been cleaned thoroughly.
.9
Complete TAB procedures on systems, submit TAB reports to Departmental Representative for
review and approval.
.10 Ensure "As-Built" system schematics are available.
.4
Inform Departmental Representative in writing of discrepancies and deficiencies on finished works.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.6
1.7
1.9
Section 01 91 13
Page 3
CONFLICTS
.1
Report conflicts between requirements of this section and other sections to Departmental Representative
before start-up and obtain clarification.
.2
Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification will result in application of most stringent requirement.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
1.8
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Submit no later than 4 weeks after award of Contract:
.1
Name of Contractor's Cx agent.
.2
Draft Cx documentation.
.3
Preliminary Cx schedule.
.2
Request in writing to Departmental Representative for changes to submittals and obtain written
approval at least 2 weeks prior to start of Cx.
.3
Submit proposed Cx procedures to Departmental Representative where not specified and obtain written
approval at least 2 weeks prior to start of Cx.
.4
Provide additional documentation relating to Cx process required by Departmental Representative.
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
.1
Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms: Installation Check Lists and Product Information (PI)
/ Performance Verification (PV) Forms for requirements and instructions for use.
.2
Departmental Representative to review and approve Cx documentation.
.3
Provide completed and approved Cx documentation to Departmental Representative.
COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE
.1
Provide detailed Cx schedule as part of construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General
Instructions.
.2
Provide adequate time for Cx activities prescribed in technical sections and commissioning sections including:
.1
Approval of Cx reports.
.2
Verification of reported results.
.3
Repairs, retesting, re-commissioning, re-verification.
.4
Training.
1.10
STARTING AND TESTING
.1
Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections. Including disassembly and re-assembly after approval,
starting, testing and adjusting, including supply of testing equipment.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.11
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 4
WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING
.1
Provide 14 days notice prior to commencement.
.2
Departmental Representative to witness of start-up and testing.
.3
Contractor's Cx Agent to be present at tests performed and documented by sub-trades, suppliers and
equipment manufacturers.
1.12
MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT
.1
Factory testing: manufacturer to:
.1
Coordinate time and location of testing.
.2
Provide testing documentation for approval by Departmental Representative.
.3
Arrange for Departmental Representative to witness tests.
.4
Obtain written approval of test results and documentation from Departmental Representative before
delivery to site.
.2
Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of components,
equipment and systems and review with Departmental Representative:
.1
Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record discrepancies, and review
with manufacturer.
.2
Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with manufacturer before
start-up.
.3
Integrity of warranties:
.1
Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other divisions or required
to maintain integrity of warranty.
.2
Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties.
.4
Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:
.1
Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems.
.2
Ability to interpret test results accurately.
.3
To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.
1.13
PROCEDURES
.1
Verify that equipment and systems are complete, clean, and operating in normal and safe manner prior to
conducting start-up, testing and Cx.
.2
Conduct start-up and testing in following distinct phases:
.1
Included in delivery and installation:
.1
Verification of conformity to specification, approved shop drawings and completion of PI report
forms.
.2
Visual inspection of quality of installation.
.2
Start-up: follow accepted start-up procedures.
.3
Operational testing: document equipment performance.
.4
System PV: include repetition of tests after correcting deficiencies.
.5
Post-substantial performance verification: to include fine-tuning.
.3
Correct deficiencies and obtain approval from Departmental Representative after distinct phases have been
completed and before commencing next phase.
Project No. R.067898.002
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 5
.4
Document require tests on approved PV forms.
.5
Failure to follow accepted start-up procedures will result in re-evaluation of equipment by an independent
testing agency selected by Departmental Representative. If results reveal that equipment start-up was not in
accordance with requirements, and resulted in damage to equipment, implement following:
.1
Minor equipment/systems: implement corrective measures approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
Major equipment/systems: if evaluation report concludes that damage is minor, implement corrective
measures approved by Departmental Representative.
.3
If evaluation report concludes that major damage has occurred, Departmental Representative shall reject
equipment.
.1
Rejected equipment to be remove from site and replace with new.
.2
Subject new equipment/systems to specified start-up procedures.
1.14
START-UP DOCUMENTATION
.1
Assemble start-up documentation and submit to Departmental Representative for approval before
commencement of commissioning.
.2
Start-up documentation to include:
.1
Factory and on-site test certificates for specified equipment.
.2
Pre-start-up inspection reports.
.3
Signed installation/start-up check lists.
.4
Start-up reports,
.5
Step-by-step description of complete start-up procedures, to permit Departmental Representative to
repeat start-up at any time.
1.15
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
After start-up, operate and maintain equipment and systems as directed by equipment/system manufacturer.
.2
With assistance of manufacturer develop written maintenance program and submit Departmental
Representative for approval before implementation.
.3
Operate and maintain systems for length of time required for commissioning to be completed.
.4
After completion of commissioning, operate and maintain systems until issuance of certificate of interim
acceptance.
1.16
TEST RESULTS
.1
If start-up, testing and/or PV produce unacceptable results, repair, replace or repeat specified starting and/or
PV procedures until acceptable results are achieved.
.2
Provide manpower and materials, assume costs for re-commissioning.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.17
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 6
START OF COMMISSIONING
.1
Notify Departmental Representative at least 21 days prior to start of Cx.
.2
Start Cx after elements of building affecting start-up and performance verification of systems have been
completed.
1.18
INSTRUMENTS / EQUIPMENT
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative for review and approval:
.1
Complete list of instruments proposed to be used.
.2
Listed data including, serial number, current calibration certificate, calibration date, calibration expiry
date and calibration accuracy.
.2
Provide the following equipment as required:
.1
2-way radios.
.2
Ladders.
.3
Equipment as required to complete work.
1.19
COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Carry out Cx:
.1
Under actual accepted simulated operating conditions, over entire operating range, in all modes.
.2
On independent systems and interacting systems.
.2
Cx procedures to be repeatable and reported results are to be verifiable.
.3
Follow equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
.4
EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification.
1.20
WITNESSING COMMISSIONING
.1
1.21
Departmental Representative to witness activities and verify results.
AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION
.1
Where specified start-up, testing or commissioning procedures duplicate verification requirements of authority
having jurisdiction, arrange for authority to witness procedures so as to avoid duplication of tests and to
facilitate expedient acceptance of facility.
.2
Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with rules and regulation of authority having
jurisdiction.
.3
Provide copies to Departmental Representative within 5 days of test and with Cx report.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.22
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 7
COMMISSIONING CONSTRAINTS
.1
1.23
Since access into secure or sensitive areas will be very difficult after occupancy it is necessary to complete Cx
of occupancy, weather, and seasonal sensitive equipment and systems in these areas before issuance of the
Interim Certificate, using, if necessary, simulated thermal loads.
EXTRAPOLATION OF RESULTS
.1
1.24
Where Cx of weather, occupancy, or seasonal-sensitive equipment or systems cannot be conducted under
near-rated or near-design conditions, extrapolate part-load results to design conditions when approved by
Departmental Representative in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's
data, with manufacturer's assistance and using approved formulae.
EXTENT OF VERIFICATION
.1
Laboratory areas:
.1
Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 100% of reported results.
.2
Elsewhere:
.1
Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results, unless specified
otherwise in other sections.
.3
Number and location to be at discretion of Departmental Representative.
.4
Conduct tests repeated during verification under same conditions as original tests, using same test equipment,
instrumentation.
.5
Review and repeat commissioning of systems if inconsistencies found in more than 20% of reported results.
.6
Perform additional commissioning until results are acceptable to Departmental Representative.
1.25
REPEAT VERIFICATIONS
.1
1.26
Assume costs incurred by Departmental Representative for third and subsequent verifications where:
.1
Verification of reported results fail to receive Departmental Representative's approval.
.2
Repetition of second verification again fails to receive approval.
.3
Departmental Representative deems Contractor's request for second verification was premature.
SUNDRY CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
.1
Make adjustments and changes which become apparent as Cx proceeds.
.2
Perform static and operational checks as applicable and as required.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.27
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 13
Page 8
DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS
.1
Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
.2
Report problems, faults or defects affecting Cx to Departmental Representative in writing. Stop Cx until
problems are rectified. Proceed with written approval from Departmental Representative.
1.28
COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING
.1
Upon completion of Cx leave systems in normal operating mode.
.2
Except for warranty and seasonal verification activities specified in Cx specifications, complete Cx prior to
issuance of Interim Certificate of Completion.
.3
Cx to be considered complete when contract Cx deliverables have been submitted and accepted by
Departmental Representative.
1.29
ACTIVITIES UPON COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING
.1
When changes are made to baseline components or system settings established during Cx process, provide
updated Cx form for affected item.
.2
Obtain MMS data forms from Departmental Representative and fill in all information for all new and removed
equipment. Forward all maintenance data for inclusion in PMSS. Obtain equipment tag info from Departmental
Representative and include on P-touch label.
1.30
TRAINING
.1
1.31
In accordance with Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) - Training.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
1.32
Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spare parts, and special tools as specified in contract.
OCCUPANCY
.1
1.33
Cooperate fully with Departmental Representative during stages of acceptance and occupancy of facility.
INSTALLED INSTRUMENTATION
.1
Use instruments installed under Contract for TAB and PV if:
.1
Accuracy complies with these specifications.
.2
Calibration certificates have been deposited with Departmental Representative.
.2
Calibrated EMCS sensors may be used to obtain performance data provided that sensor calibration has been
completed and accepted.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.34
GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES
.1
Application tolerances:
.1
Specified range of acceptable deviations of measured values from specified values or specified design
criteria. Except for special areas, to be within +/- 10% of specified values.
.2
Instrument accuracy tolerances:
.1
To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.
.3
Measurement tolerances during verification:
.1
Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within +/- 2% of recorded values.
1.35
DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE'S PERFORMANCE TESTING
.1
Performance testing of equipment or system by Departmental Representative will not relieve Contractor from
compliance with specified start-up and testing procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Section 01 91 13
Page 9
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMISSIONING FORMS
Section 01 91 33
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section Includes:
.1
Commissioning forms to be completed for equipment, system and integrated system.
INSTALLATION/ START-UP CHECK LISTS
.1
Include the following data:
.1
Product manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended checks.
.2
Special procedures as specified in relevant technical sections.
.3
Items considered good installation and engineering industry practices deemed appropriate for proper
and efficient operation.
.2
Equipment manufacturer's installation/start-up check lists are acceptable for use. As deemed necessary
by Departmental Representative supplemental additional data lists will be required for specific project
conditions.
.3
Use check lists for equipment installation. Document check list verifying checks have been made, indicate
deficiencies and corrective action taken.
.4
Installer to sign check lists upon completion, certifying stated checks and inspections have been
performed. Return completed check lists to Departmental Representative. Check lists will be required
during Commissioning and will be included in Building Maintenance Manual (BMM) at completion of
project.
.5
Use of check lists will not be considered part of commissioning process but will be stringently used for
equipment pre-start and start-up procedures.
PRODUCT INFORMATION (PI) REPORT FORMS
.1
Product Information (PI) forms compiles gathered data on items of equipment produced by equipment
manufacturer, includes nameplate information, parts list, operating instructions, maintenance guidelines and
pertinent technical data and recommended checks that is necessary to prepare for start-up and functional
testing and used during operation and maintenance of equipment. This documentation is included in the
BMM at completion of work.
.2
Prior to Performance Verification (PV) of systems complete items on PI forms related to systems and
obtain Departmental Representative's approval.
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) FORMS
.1
PV forms to be used for checks, running dynamic tests and adjustments carried out on equipment and
systems to ensure correct operation, efficiently and function independently and interactively with other
systems as intended with project requirements.
.2
PV report forms include those developed by Contractor records measured data and readings taken during
functional testing and Performance Verification procedures.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
1.5
1.6
1.8
Section 01 91 33
Page 2
Prior to PV of integrated system, complete PV forms of related systems and obtain Departmental
Representative's approval.
SAMPLES OF COMMISSIONING FORMS
.1
Departmental Representative will develop and provide to Contractor required project-specific
Commissioning forms in electronic format complete with specification data.
.2
Revise items on Commissioning forms to suit project requirements.
.3
Samples of Commissioning forms and a complete index of produced to date will be attached to this
section.
CHANGES AND DEVELOPMENT OF NEW REPORT FORMS
.1
1.7
COMMISSIONING FORMS
When additional forms are required, but are not available from Departmental Representative develop
appropriate verification forms and submit to Departmental Representative for approval prior to use.
.1
Additional commissioning forms to be in same format as provided by Departmental Representative.
COMMISSIONING FORMS
.1
Use Commissioning forms to verify installation and record performance when starting equipment and
systems.
.2
Strategy for Use:
.1
Departmental Representative provides Contractor project-specific Commissioning forms with
Specification data included.
.2
Contractor will provide required shop drawings information and verify correct installation and
operation of items indicated on these forms.
.3
Confirm operation as per design criteria and intent.
.4
Identify variances between design and operation and reasons for variances.
.5
Verify operation in specified normal and emergency modes and under specified load conditions.
.6
Record analytical and substantiating data.
.7
Verify reported results.
.8
Form to bear signatures of recording technician and reviewed and signed off by Departmental
Representative.
.9
Submit immediately after tests are performed.
.10 Reported results in true measured SI unit values.
.11 Provide Departmental Representative with originals of completed forms.
.12 Maintain copy on site during start-up, testing and commissioning period.
.13 Forms to be both hard copy and electronic format with typed written results in Building
Management Manual.
LANGUAGE
.1
To suit the language profile of the awarded contract.
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMISSIONING FORMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
Section 01 91 33
Page 3
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMISSIONING: TRAINING
Section 01 91 41
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
TRAINEES
.1
Trainees: personnel selected for operating and maintaining this facility. Includes Property Manager,
building operators, maintenance staff, security staff, and technical specialists as required.
.2
Trainees will be available for training during later stages of construction for purposes of familiarization
with systems.
INSTRUCTORS
.1
Departmental Representative will provide:
.1
Descriptions of systems.
.2
Instruction on design philosophy, design criteria, and design intent.
.2
Contractor and certified factory-trained manufacturers' personnel: to provide instruction on the following:
.1
Start-Up, operation, shut-down of equipment, components and systems.
.2
Control features, reasons for, results of, implications on associated systems of, adjustment of set
points of control and safety devices.
.3
Instructions on servicing, maintenance and adjustment of systems, equipment and components.
.3
Contractor and equipment manufacturer to provide instruction on:
.1
Start-up, operation, maintenance and shut-down of equipment they have certified installation, started
up and carried out PV tests.
TRAINING OBJECTIVES
.1
1.5
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies roles and responsibilities of Commissioning Training.
Training to be detailed and duration to ensure:
.1
Safe, reliable, cost-effective, energy-efficient operation of systems in normal and emergency modes
under all conditions.
.2
Effective on-going inspection, measurements of system performance.
.3
Proper preventive maintenance, diagnosis and trouble-shooting.
.4
Ability to update documentation.
.5
Ability to operate equipment and systems under emergency conditions until appropriate qualified
assistance arrives.
TRAINING MATERIALS
.1
Instructors to be responsible for content and quality.
.2
Training materials to include:
.1
"As-Built" Contract Documents.
.2
Operating Manual.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
COMMISSIONING: TRAINING
Section 01 91 41
Page 2
Maintenance Manual.
Management Manual.
TAB and PV Reports.
.3
Department Representative and Commissioning Manager will review training manuals.
.4
Training materials to be in a format that permits future training procedures to same degree of detail.
.5
Supplement training materials:
.1
Transparencies for overhead projectors.
.2
Multimedia presentations.
.3
Manufacturer's training videos.
.4
Equipment models.
SCHEDULING
.1
Include in Commissioning Schedule time for training.
.2
Deliver training during regular working hours, training sessions to be 3 hours in length.
.3
Training to be completed prior to acceptance of facility.
TRAINING CONTENT
.1
Training to include demonstrations by Instructors using the installed equipment and systems.
.2
Content includes:
.1
Review of facility and occupancy profile.
.2
Functional requirements.
.3
System philosophy, limitations of systems and emergency procedures.
.4
Review of system layout, equipment, components and controls.
.5
Equipment and system start-up, operation, monitoring, servicing, maintenance and shut-down
procedures.
.6
System operating sequences, including step-by-step directions for starting up, shut-down, operation
of valves, dampers, switches, adjustment of control settings and emergency procedures.
.7
Maintenance and servicing.
.8
Trouble-shooting diagnosis.
.9
Inter-Action among systems during integrated operation.
.10 Review of O&M documentation.
.3
Provide specialized training as specified in relevant Technical Sections of the construction specifications.
VIDEO-BASED TRAINING
.1
Manufacturer's videotapes to be used as training tool with Departmental Representative's review and
written approval 3 weeks prior to commencement of scheduled training.
.2
On-Site training videos:
.1
Videotape training sessions for use during future training.
.2
To be performed after systems are fully commissioned.
.3
Organize into several short modules to permit incorporation of changes.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
COMMISSIONING: TRAINING
Production methods to be professional high quality.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
Section 01 91 41
Page 3
Project No. R.067898.002
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 09 30 13 – Ceramic Tiling
.2
Section 22 42 16 – Commercial Lavatories and Sinks
.3
Section 26 50 00 - Lighting
1.2
Section 06 40 00
Page 1 of 9
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
.2
.3
.2
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.3
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
CSA B111-74(R2003), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
CSA O112.10-08(R2013), Evaluation of Adhesives for Structural Wood Products
(Limited Moisture Exposure).
CSA O121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.
CSA O141-05(R2009), Softwood Lumber.
CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood.
CSA O153-13, Poplar Plywood.
CAN/CSA-Z809-08(2013), Sustainable Forest Management.
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
.1
.7
CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable.
CSA International
.1
.2
.6
Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 2009.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.5
ASTM E1333-10, Standard Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde
Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates From Wood Products Using a Large
Chamber.
ASTM D2832-92(R2011), Standard Guide for Determining Volatile and
Nonvolatile Content of Paint and Related Coatings.
ASTM D5116-10, Standard Guide For Small-Scale Environmental Chamber
Determinations of Organic Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products.
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) and
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)
.1
.4
ANSI A208.1-09, Particleboard.
ANSI A208.2-09, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications.
ANSI/HPVA HP-1-09, Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
FSC-STD-01-001-2004, FSC Principle and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
GS-11-11, Paints and Coatings.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.8
.2
Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2010.
SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2013, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI)
.1
1.3
Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress 2011.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
.2
.14
ANSI/NEMA LD-3-05, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL).
National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA)
.1
.13
ISO 14040-2006, Environmental Management-Life Cycle Assessment Principles and Framework.
ISO 14041-98, Environmental Management-Life Cycle Assessment - Goal and
Scope Definition and Inventory Analysis.
National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA)
.1
.12
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.1
.11
GS-36-13, Commercial Adhesives.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
.1
.10
Section 06 40 00
Page 2 of 9
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.9
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SFI-2010-2014 Standard.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
architectural woodwork and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29 Health and Safety Requirements.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related
details.
.1
details 1:2 or 1:5 as appropriate
Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware.
Indicate locations of service outlets in casework, typical and special installation
conditions, and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed
fastenings.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 3 of 9
Samples:
.1
.2
Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic for colour selection.
Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and
postformed profiles.
.5
Certifications: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.6
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
.2
.3
1.4
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
Wood Certification: submit vendor's Chain-of-Custody Certificate number for
FSC certified wood.
.1
Submit manufacturer's FSC Chain-of-Custody Certificate number.
Low-Emitting Materials:
.1
Submit listing of adhesives and sealants, paints and coatings used in
building, comply with VOC and chemical component limits or
restrictions requirements.
.2
Submit listing of composite wood products used in building, stating that
they contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins, laminate adhesives used
in building, stating that they contain no urea-formaldehyde.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards
Accreditation Board.
.2
Sustainable Standards Certification:
.1
.3
1.5
Certified Wood: submit listing of wood products and materials used in
accordance with CAN/CSA-Z809 or FSC or SFI.
Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels to CSA and ANSI
standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.1
.2
.3
Protect millwork against dampness and damage during and after delivery.
Store millwork in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of
temperature or humidity.
Storage and Handling Requirements:
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
.3
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 4 of 9
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect architectural woodwork from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan related
to Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management
and Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Softwood lumber: unless specified otherwise, S4S, moisture content 15 % or less in
accordance with following standards:
.1
.2
.3
.4
CSA O141.
CAN/CSA-Z809 or FSC or SFI certified.
NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
AWMAC Grade II, moisture content as specified.
.2
Machine stress-rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.
.3
Ensure manufacturing process adheres to Lifecycle Assessment (LCA) Standards to ISO
14040/14041 LCA Standards.
.4
Hardwood lumber: moisture content in accordance with following standards:
.1
.2
.5
Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction, FSC certified.
.1
.6
Particleboard resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
Fibreboard must contain less than 10% roundwood by weight, using weighted average
over three month period at manufacturing locations.
.1
.2
.9
Plywood resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
Interior mat-formed wood particleboard: to ANSI/NPA A208.1, FSC certified.
.1
.8
Plywood resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
Hardwood plywood for countertops: to ANSI/HPVA HP-1, FSC certified.
.1
.7
FSC Certified
AWMAC Grade II, moisture content as specified.
Fibreboard resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
FSC certified.
Hardboard:
.1
.2
To CAN/CGSB-11.3, FSC certified.
Hardboard resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
Project No. R.067898.002
.10
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 5 of 9
MDF (medium density fibreboard) core: to ANSI A208.2, 16 mm thick unless otherwise
indicated, density 769 kg/m2, FSC certified.
.1
.2
Medium density fibreboard performance requirements to: ANSI A208.2.
MDF resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
.11
Laminated plastic for flatwork: to NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, Type HD, 1.2 mm thick;
based on manufacturer’s standard colour range.
.12
Laminated plastic backing sheet: Grade BK, Type HD, same thickness as face laminate,
white colour.
.13
Laminated plastic liner sheet: Grade GP, Type HD, 0.5 mm thick, white colour.
.14
Nails and staples: to CSA B111.
.15
Wood screws: plain, type and size to suit application.
.16
Splines: wood
.17
Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
.1
.18
Laminated plastic adhesive:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.2
Sealants: VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
Adhesive: , contact adhesive to CAN/CGSB-71.20
Adhesives: VOC limit 30 g/L maximum to GS-36.
Clear Wood Finishes: VOC limit 350 g/L maximum to GS-11
Paints: VOC limit 50 g/L maximum to GS-11.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Casework:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Fabricate caseworks to AWMAC custom quality grade.
Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds and rough bucks and sleepers.
.1
Board sizes: "standard" or better grade.
.2
Dimension sizes: "standard" light framing or better grade.
.3
Urea-formaldehyde free.
Framing species, NLGA grade.
Case bodies (ends, divisions and bottoms).
.1
Softwood and poplar plywood DFP or CSP or PP or particleboard,
square edge, 19 mm thick unless otherwise indicated, grade suitable for
application of plastic laminate. Plastic laminate all exposed faces and
edges, including face of cabinets behind doors and drawers, plastic
laminate backing sheet on opposite concealed faces.
Backs:
.1
Hardboard, Type 2, 6 mm thick.
Shelving:
.1
Concealed locations:
.1
Particleboard, 19mm thick, plastic laminate liner sheet all faces
and edges
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
Fabricate drawers to AWMAC custom grade supplemented as follows:
Backs.
.1
Hardwood plywood:
.1
Thickness: 12.7mm.
.2
Number of plies: 7.
.3
Plastic laminate liner sheet all faces and edges
Bottoms:
.1
Hardboard: type 2, 6 mm thick.
Fronts:
.1
Particleboard, 19mm thick, plastic laminate all faces and edges.
Sides
.1
Manufactured metal drawer side and slide system that includes
attachment provisions for back and bottom and hardware mounting
brackets for drawer face that facilitates tool-free drawer face attachment
and removal.
Fabricate doors to AWMAC custom grade supplemented as follows:
Particleboard, 19mm thick, plastic laminate all faces and edges
Countertops:
.1
.2
.3
2.3
Exposed locations:
.1
Particleboard, 19mm thick, plastic laminate all faces and edges
Casework Doors:
.1
.2
.4
Section 06 40 00
Page 6 of 9
Drawers:
.1
.2
.3
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Fabricate countertops to AWMAC custom grade supplemented as follows:
Laminated Plastic for flatwork on front surface, front edge, and all edges of
interior openings
Hardwood plywood:
.1
Thickness: 19 mm
.2
Number of plies: 7
.3
Core: veneer
.4
Bond: Type II
.5
Shop sanded exterior grade
.6
Laminated plastic backing sheet on back surface
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate to AWMAC Custom grade.
.2
Cabinet style: flush overlay.
.3
Set nails and countersink screws, apply plain wood filler to indentations, sand smooth
and leave ready to receive finish.
.4
Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Recess shelf standards
unless noted otherwise.
Project No. R.067898.002
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 7 of 9
.5
Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted.
.6
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures.
.7
Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage
through building openings.
.8
Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut
appliances, equipment and other materials.
.9
Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.
.10
Veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support
and bond over entire surface. Use continuous lengths up to 2400 mm. Keep joints 600
mm from sink cutouts.
.11
Use straight self-edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core
material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre
laminate edges.
.12
Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of core of plastic laminate work.
.13
Apply laminated plastic liner sheet to interior of cabinetry and where indicated.
2.4
CABINET HARDWARE
.1
.2
.3
.4
Shelf rests: to CAN/CGSB 69.25-M90 ANSI/BHMA A156.9-1982 brushed chrome
finish, B04081.
Adjustable recessed shelf standards: to CAN/CGSB 69.25-M90 ANSI/BHMA A156.91982 brushed chrome finish, B04071.
Cabinet hinges: to CAN/CGSB 69.25-M90 ANSI/BHMA A156.9-1982 concealed,
brushed chrome finishes, B01601. Two (2) per door up to 915 mm, three (3) per door up
to 1500 mm.
Door and drawer pulls: wire D-pulls, 100 mm centres, 8mm diameter, brushed stainless
steel finish
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for architectural woodwork installation in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative
Project No. R.067898.002
3.2
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 8 of 9
INSTALLATION
.1
Do architectural woodwork to AWMAC Custom Grade.
.2
Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on drawings.
.1
.3
Position accurately, level, plumb straight.
Fasten and anchor millwork securely.
.1
Supply and install heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.
.4
Use draw bolts in countertop joints.
.5
Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to
accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or
penetrating objects.
.6
At junction of plastic laminate counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small
bead of sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
.7
Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with
masonry or cementitious construction.
.8
Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.9
Site apply laminated plastic to units as indicated.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.10
3.3
Adhere laminated plastic over entire surface.
Make corners with hairline joints.
Use full sized laminate sheets.
Make joints only where indicated or approved by Departmental Representative
Slightly bevel arises.
For site application, offset joints in plastic laminate facing from joints in core.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions
.1
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Clean millwork, cabinet work, outside surfaces, inside cupboards, drawers.
Remove excess glue from surfaces.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.4
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect millwork cabinet work from damage until final inspection.
.2
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 9 of 9
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by architectural woodwork installation.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
JOINT SEALANTS
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork
.2
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.2
Section 07 92 00
Page 1 of 6
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
1.3
FS-SS-S-200-E(2)1993, Sealants, Joint, Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant,
Cold Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.5
CGSB 19-GP-5M-1984, Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Base,
Solvent Curing (Issue of 1976 reaffirmed, incorporating Amendment No. 1).
CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric,
Chemical Curing.
CGSB 19-GP-14M-1984, Sealing Compound, One Component, ButylPolyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing (Reaffirmation of April 1976).
CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One-Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing
Compound.
CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multi-component, Chemical Curing Sealing
Compound.
General Services Administration (GSA) - Federal Specifications (FS)
.1
.4
ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical
Applications.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
joint sealants and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Manufacturer's product to describe:
.1
Caulking compound.
.2
Primers.
Project No. R.067898.002
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 2 of 6
.3
.3
.3
Samples:
.1
.2
.4
Submit instructions to include installation instructions for each product used.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
.2
1.4
Submit 2 samples of each type of material and colour.
Cured samples of exposed sealants for each colour where required to match
adjacent material.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
.1
.5
Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different
sealants are in contact with each other.
Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 Health and Safety Requirements.
.
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for
incorporation into manual.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect joint sealants from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan related to
Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.6
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 3 of 6
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Conditions:
.1
.2
Joint-Width Conditions:
.1
.3
Proceed with installation of joint sealants only where joint widths are more than
those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
Joint-Substrate Conditions:
.1
1.7
Proceed with installation of joint sealants only when:
.1
Ambient and substrate temperature conditions are within limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer or are above 4.4 degrees C.
.2
Joint substrates are dry.
.3
Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative
humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of
sealants including special conditions governing use.
Proceed with installation of joint sealants only after contaminants capable of
interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and
regarding labelling and provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) acceptable to
Health Canada.
.2
Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative.
Part 2
Products
2.1
SEALANT MATERIALS
.1
Do not use caulking that emits strong odours, contains toxic chemicals or is not certified
as mould resistant in air handling units.
.2
When low toxicity caulks are not possible, confine usage to areas which off gas to
exterior, are contained behind air barriers, or are applied several months before
occupancy to maximize off gas time.
.3
Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.
2.2
SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
.1
Clear Silicones one part: to CAN/CGSB-19.13.
.2
Paintable Acrylic latex one part: to CAN/CGSB-19.17.
.3
Acoustical sealant: to ASTM C919.
.4
Preformed compressible and non-compressible back-up materials:
.1
Polyethylene, urethane, neoprene or vinyl foam:
.1
Extruded closed cell foam backer rod.
.2
Size: oversize 30 to 50 %.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
.4
2.3
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 4 of 6
Neoprene or butyl rubber:
.1
Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70.
High density foam:
.1
Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC), extruded polyethylene,
closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa,
extruded polyolefin foam, 32 kg/m3 density, or neoprene foam backer,
size as recommended by manufacturer.
Bond breaker tape:
.1
Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.
SEALANT SELECTION
.1
Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: sealant type: Acrylic Latex
.2
Perimeter of plumbing fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, water closets, basins,
vanities): sealant type: Silicone
.3
Junction of millwork and adjacent surfaces: Silicone
.4
Exposed interior control joints in drywall: sealant type: Acrylic Latex
.5
All penetrations acoustic-rated partitions as well as junction of acoustic partition and
concrete slab: Acoustic
2.4
JOINT CLEANER
.1
Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant
in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written recommendations.
.2
Primer: in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written recommendations.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for joint sealants installation in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative
SURFACE PREPARATION
.1
Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for
installation of backup materials and sealants.
Project No. R.067898.002
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 5 of 6
.2
Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease,
and other matter which may impair Work.
.3
Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water
repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of
materials. Remove coatings as required.
.4
Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.
.5
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.3
PRIMING
.1
Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and
caulking.
.2
Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately
prior to caulking.
3.4
BACKUP MATERIAL
.1
Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30%
compression.
3.5
MIXING
.1
3.6
Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
APPLICATION
.1
Sealant:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Curing:
.1
.2
3.7
Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to
provide neat joint.
Apply sealant in continuous beads.
Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.
Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.
Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags,
air pockets, embedded impurities.
Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.1
.2
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Clean adjacent surfaces immediately.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 6 of 6
Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.
Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal
.1
3.8
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by joint sealants installation.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
METAL FRAMES
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors
.2
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware
.3
Section 08 80 50 - Glazing
1.2
Section 08 11 00
Page 1 of 4
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.3
.2
SCAQMD Rule 1113-13, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-05, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
.3
1.3
CSDMA, Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames,
2006.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State
.1
.2
.6
CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA)
.1
.5
CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.4
ASTM A653/A653M-09, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and
Pipe Covering.
CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for
Buildings.
CAN/ULC-S704-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and
Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Provide product data: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.3
Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops,
location of anchors and exposed fastenings reinforcing, finishes.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
METAL FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 2 of 4
Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to
numbering on drawings and door schedule.
Submit test and engineering data, and installation instructions.
.4
Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.5
Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of frame.
.1
1.4
Show butt cutout glazing stops snap-on trim with clips 300 mm long removable
mullion connection..
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse /recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21
- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A653M, ZF75, minimum base steel
thickness in accordance with CSDMA Table 1 - Thickness for Component Parts.
.2
Reinforcement channel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation to
ASTM A653M, ZF75.
2.2
PRIMER
.1
Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.1
2.3
Maximum VOC limit 50 g/L to GC-03.
PAINT
.1
2.4
Field paint steel frames in accordance with Sections 09 91 23 – Interior Painting. Protect
weatherstrips from paint. Provide final finish free of scratches or other blemishes.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type.
.2
Fabricate glazing stops as formed channel, minimum 16 mm height, accurately fitted,
butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal
screws.
.3
Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard.
.4
Make provisions for glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.
.1
.2
Provide removable stainless steel glazing beads for use with glazing tapes and
compounds and secured with countersunk stainless steel screws dry glazing of
snap-on type.
Design exterior glazing stops to be tamperproof.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.5
METAL FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 3 of 4
FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL
.1
Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications.
.2
Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated.
.3
Interior frames: 1.2 mm welded type construction.
.4
Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, templated hardware, using templates
provided by finish hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware.
.5
Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes.
.6
Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door.
.7
Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted.
.8
Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated.
.9
Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed
during fabrication.
.10
Insulate exterior frame components with polyurethane insulation.
2.6
FRAME ANCHORAGE
.1
Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction.
.2
Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge
jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb.
.3
Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for
each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof.
.4
Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and
bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm on centre maximum.
2.7
FRAMES: WELDED TYPE
.1
Welding in accordance with CSA W59.
.2
Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of
profile.
.3
Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and
sills.
.4
Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to
uniform smooth finish.
.5
Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.
.6
Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during
shipment.
Project No. R.067898.002
METAL FRAMES
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 08 11 00
Page 4 of 4
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
3.3
Install frames to CSDMA Installation Guide.
FRAME INSTALLATION
.1
Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.
.2
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
.3
Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood
spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support
at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after
frames are built-in.
.4
Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted
to frames.
.5
Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material.
3.4
DOOR INSTALLATION
.1
Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's
instructions and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
.2
Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floorand
thresholds as follows.
.1
.2
.3
Hinge side: 1.0 mm.
Latchside and head: 1.5 mm.
Finished floor, top of carpet noncombustible sill and thresholds: 13 mm.
.3
Adjust operable parts for correct function.
.4
Install louvres.
3.5
FINISH REPAIRS
.1
Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation.
.2
Fill exposed frame anchors surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and sand
to a uniform smooth finish.
3.6
GLAZING
.1
Install glazing for doors frames in accordance with Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 08 11 00 – Metal Frames
.2
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware
.3
Section 08 80 50 - Glazing
1.2
Section 08 14 16
Page 1 of 4
REFERENCES
.1
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC).
.1
.2
ASTM International
.1
.3
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
CSA A440.2-14, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration
Systems.
CSA O115-M1982(R2001), Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
CAN/CSA O132.2 Series-90(2003), Wood Flush Doors.
CAN/CSA-O132.5-M1992(R1998), Stile and Rail Wood Doors.
CAN/CSA-Z808-96, A Sustainable Forest Management System: Guidance
Document.
CSA Certification Program for Windows and Doors 00.
Environmental Choice Program (ECP).
.1
.2
1.3
CAN/CGSB-71.19-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Sprayable.
CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.5
ASTM D5456-14, Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite
Lumber Products
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).
.1
.2
.4
Architectural Woodwork Standards (2009)
CCD-045-95, Sealants and Caulking Compounds.
CCD-046-96, Adhesives.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
.2
.2
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Indicate VOC's:
.1
For caulking materials during application and curing.
.2
For door materials and adhesives.
Shop Drawings:
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
1.4
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Section 08 14 16
Page 2 of 4
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
Indicate door types and cutouts for lights, sizes, core construction.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type wood door.
.3
Show door construction, core, glazing detail and faces.
.4
Manufacturer's Instructions:
.1
1.5
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Regulatory Requirements:
.2
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.3
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.4
Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,
manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Storage and Protection:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.7
Protect doors from dampness. Arrange for delivery after work causing abnormal
humidity has been completed.
Store doors in well ventilated room, off floor, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Protect doors from scratches, handling marks and other damage. Wrap doors.
Store doors away from direct sunlight.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.2
Dispose of corrugated cardboard polystyrene plastic packaging material in appropriate
on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.3
Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to
municipal recycling programs.
.4
Divert unused adhesive material from landfill to official hazardous material collections
site approved by Departmental Representative.
.5
Do not dispose of unused paint materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto
ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
Project No. R.067898.002
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Part 2
Products
2.1
WOOD FLUSH DOORS
.1
Solid core: to CAN/CSA-O132.2.1.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.2
Section 08 14 16
Page 3 of 4
Construction: particle core, ultra heavy-duty, anti-warping construction:
Stiles: 3 mm thick veneer, longitudinally laminated by hot pressing with type 1
structural glue, as per ASTM-D5456-93 (LVL FSC), including a 22 mm piece of
hardwood, matched with faces, for a total width of 107 mm.
Top and bottom rails: 3 mm thick veneer, longitudinally laminated by hot
pressing with type 1 structural glue, as per ASTM-D5456-93 (LVL FSC), or
laminated strand lumber (LSL) for a total width of 85 mm.
Core: Solid particleboard. Density of 0.45-0.50 metric ton per cubic metre.
Complies with CSA-0188 and ANSI A208-1 standards (LD‑1/LD-2). Available
NAUF/FSC (LD-2).
Faces: Oak veneer (2 ply plywood). Available NAUF/FSC.
Lock Block: Integrated
Adhesive: Type I PVA Cross-link (NAUF)
FABRICATION
.1
Vertical edge strips to match face veneer.
.2
Prepare doors for glazing. Provide glazing stops hardwood oak species with mitred
corners.
.3
Bevel vertical edges of single acting doors 3 mm in 50 mmon lock side and 1.5 mm in 50
mm on hinge side.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions, and data sheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Unwrap and protect doors in accordance with CAN/CSA-O132.2 Series, Appendix A.
.2
Install labelled fire rated doors to NFPA 80.
.3
Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
CAN/CSA-O132.2 Series, Appendix A.
.4
Adjust hardware for correct function.
.5
Install glazing in accordance with Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Section 08 14 16
Page 4 of 4
ADJUSTMENT
.1
3.4
Re-adjust doors and hardware just prior to completion of building to function freely and
properly.
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and
accumulated environmental dirt.
.2
Remove traces of primer, caulking; clean doors and frames.
.3
Clean glass and glazing materials with approved non-abrasive cleaner.
.4
On completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
barriers.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
DOOR HARDWARE
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 08 71 00
Page 1 of 7
Section 08 14 16 – Wood Doors
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (BHMA)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2000, American National Standard for Butts and Hinges.
ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2003, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
ANSI/BHMA A156.6-2005, Architectural Door Trim.
ANSI/BHMA A156.13-2002, Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000.
ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes.
.2
CAN/CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment
.3
Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA)
.1
1.3
CSDMA Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and
Frames - 2009.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
door hardware and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph
number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number.
After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in Work.
Hardware List:
.1
.2
Submit contract hardware list.
Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size,
finish and other pertinent information.
.5
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.6
Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.7
Sustainable Design Submittals:
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
1.4
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00
Page 2 of 7
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
Recycled Content:
.1
Submit listing of recycled content products used, including details of
required percentages or recycled content materials and products, showing
their costs and percentages of post-consumer post-industrial content, and
total cost of materials for project.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for door
hardware for incorporation into manual.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Stock Materials:
.1
.2
1.6
Supply maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
Tools:
.1
Supply 2 sets of wrenches for door closers locksets and fire exit
hardware.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Regulatory Requirements:
.1
.2
1.7
Hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors certified by a Canadian
Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Package items of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware,
label each package as to item definition and location.
.4
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect door hardware from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00
Page 3 of 7
Protect prefinished surfaces with wrapping.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.5
Develop Construction Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section.
.6
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Reduction
Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste
Management and Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's products only for similar items.
.2
All hardware to be finish 626 (satin chrome) unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
DOOR HARDWARE
.1
Locks and latches:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
Butts and hinges:
.1
.3
Butts and hinges: to ANSI/BHMA A156.1, designated by letter A and numeral
identifiers, followed by size and finish, listed in Hardware Schedule.
Auxiliary hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, designated by letter L and numeral
identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule as listed below, finish to match leverset.
.1
2.3
Bored and preassembled locks and latches: to ANSI/BHMA A156.2, grade 1
designed for function and keyed as stated in Hardware Schedule.
Lever handles : plain design.
Roses: round.
Normal strikes: box type, lip projection not beyond jamb.
Cylinders: key into keying system as directed.
stop, floor mounted
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
.1
2.4
Indexed key control system: to ANSI/BHMA A156.5, designated by letter E and numeral
identifiers, paint finish to Departmental Representative’s selection.
FASTENINGS
.1
Use only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Failure to comply may void warranties and
applicable licensed labels.
.2
Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for
satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.
.3
Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.
.4
Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.5
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00
Page 4 of 7
KEYING
.1
Door locks to be keyed differently and master keyed as noted in Hardware Schedule.
Prepare detailed keying schedule in conjunction with Departmental Representative.
.2
Supply 2 keys in for every lock in this Contract.
.3
Supply 3 master keys for each master key or grand master key group.
.4
Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders.
.5
permanent cores and keys by Departmental Representative.
.6
Obtain written approval of the complete keying system prior to keying of locks.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product
carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
.2
Supply metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for
preparation of their work to receive hardware.
.3
Supply manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.
.4
Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with CSDFMA
Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction).
.5
Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of pull.
.6
Install key control cabinet.
.7
Use only manufacturer's supplied fasteners.
.1
.8
Remove construction cores locks when directed by Departmental Representative
.1
3.2
Use of "quick" type fasteners, unless specifically supplied by manufacturer, is
unacceptable.
Install permanent cores and ensure locks operate correctly.
ADJUSTING
.1
Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating
condition, safety and for weather tight closure.
.2
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.
.3
Adjust door hardware to ensure tight fit at contact points with frames.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
.2
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish
hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
.2
Section 08 71 00
Page 5 of 7
Remove protective material from hardware items where present.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions..
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.4
DOOR HARDWARE
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Keying System Setup and Cabinet:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Maintenance Staff Briefing:
.1
.3
3.5
Set up key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical index,
alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key
receipt cards.
Place file keys and duplicate keys in key cabinet on their respective hooks.
Lock key cabinet and turn over key to Departmental Representative
Brief maintenance staff regarding:
.1
Proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of projects complete
hardware.
.2
Description, use, handling, and storage of keys.
.3
Use, application and storage of wrenches for door closers and locksets.
Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication
requirements.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by door hardware installation.
Project No. R.067898.002
DOOR HARDWARE
3.6
SCHEDULE
GROUP # 01
701.1, 1104.1, 1403.1, 1904.1
QTÉ
3
1
1
Note:


DESCRIPTION
Wood Door/Hollow Metal Frame
Ball bearing hinges
A8112 - 4.5 x 4
Bored lock office function grade 1
F81x GMK x MK x CK x 3 KEYS
Dome floor door stop
LO2141
3
1
1
Note:

FINI
MANUFACTURIER
652
626
626
The quantities stated are the unit amounts required for each door cited in references.
Cylinders are Multi-Lock and the permanent keying will be done by the Departmental Representative
GROUP # 02
QTÉ
Section 08 71 00
Page 6 of 7
702.1, 703.1, 704.1, 705.1, 706.1, 708.1, 709.1, 711.1, 711.2, 712.1, 1101.1, 1102.1, 1103.1,
1108.1, 1118.1, 1401.1, 1402.1, 1404.1, 1405.1, 1406.1, 1406.2, 1407.1, 1408.1, 1901.1, 1902.1,
1903.1, 1905.1, 1906.1, 1906.2,
DESCRIPTION
Wood Door/Hollow Metal Frame
Ball bearing hinges
A8112 - 4.5 x 4
Bored lock passage function grade 1
F75 x
Dome floor door stop
LO2141
FINI
652
626
626
The quantities stated are the unit amounts required for each door cited in references.
MANUFACTURIER
Project No. R.067898.002
GROUP # 03
QTÉ
Note :

DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00
Page 7 of 7
700.1, 700.2, 700.3, 700.4, 700.5, 700.6, 700.7, 700.8, 700.9, 700.10, 700.11, 700.12, 700.13,
714.1, 715.1, 716.1, 717.1, 718.1, 719.1, 1100.1, 1100.2, 1100.3, 1100.4, 1100.5, 1100.6, 1100.7,
1100.8, 1100.9, 1100.10, 1112.1, 1113.1, 1115.1, 1116.1, 1400.1, 1400.2, 1400.3, 1400.4, 1400.5,
1400.6, 1400.7, 1400.8, 1400.9, 1400.10, 1900.1, 1900.2, 1900.4, 1900.5, 1900.6, 1900.7, 1900.8,
1900.9, 1900.10, 1907.1, 1908.1
DESCRIPTION
EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN
FINI
The quantities stated are the unit amounts required for each door cited in references.
END OF SECTION
MANUFACTURIER
Project No. R.067898.002
GLAZING
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 08 11 00 – Metal Frames
.2
Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors
1.2
Section 08 80 50
Page 1 of 6
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
CCD-045-95(R2005), Sealants and Caulking Compounds.
Glass Association of North American (GANA)
.1
.2
.5
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.2-M91, Flat, Clear Sheet Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units.
CAN/CGSB-12.8-97 (Amendment), Insulating Glass Units.
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
.1
.4
ASTM C542-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets.
ASTM D790-10, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
ASTM D1003-11, Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Plastics.
ASTM D1929-10, Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature
of Plastics.
ASTM D2240-05 (2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness.
ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
ASTM E330-02, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
ASTM F1233-08, Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and
Systems.
GANA Glazing Manual - 2008.
GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual - 2009.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50
Page 2 of 6
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pre-Installation Meetings:
.1
.2
1.4
Convene pre-installation meeting 1 week prior to beginning work of this Section
on-site installation, with Contractor's Representative and Departmental
Representative to:
.1
Verify project requirements.
.2
Review installation and substrate conditions.
.3
Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
.4
Review manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
Arrange for site visit with Departmental Representative prior to start of Work to examine
existing site conditions adjacent to demolition Work.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
glass, sealants, and glazing accessories and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit duplicate samples of setting blocks, glazing tape and sealant material.
.4
Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.5
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.1
.2
.6
Submit testing analysis of glass under provisions of Section 01 45 00 - Quality
Control.
Submit shop inspection testing for glass.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
.2
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan/Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
Low-Emitting Materials:
.1
Submit listing of adhesives and sealants used in building, showing
compliance with VOC and chemical component limits or restrictions
requirements.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50
Page 3 of 6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for glazing for
incorporation into manual.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
Mock-ups:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.7
Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
Construct mock-up to include glazing
Mock-up will be used:
.1
To judge quality of work, substrate preparation, operation of equipment
and material application..
Locate where directed where indicated.
Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required
for this work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect glazing and frames from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Reduction
Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste
Management and Disposal
1.8
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Requirements:
.1
.2
Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10 degrees C minimum. Maintain
ventilated environment for 24 hours after application.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
2.2
Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads to ASTM
E330
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexural limit of glass with full recovery of
glazing materials.
Flat Glass:
.1
.3
Section 08 80 50
Page 4 of 6
Design Criteria:
.1
.2
GLAZING
Safety glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1, transparent, 6 mm thick.
.1
Type 2-tempered.
.2
Class B-float.
.3
Category 1.
.4
Edge treatment.
Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Setting blocks: to suit glazing method, glass light weight and area
.2
Spacer shims: neoprene, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm
long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one
face.
.3
Glazing tape:
.1
.2
Preformed butyl compound, 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM
D2240; coiled on release paper; black colour.
Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on
two sides, maximum water absorption by volume 2 %, designed for compression
of 25 %
.4
Glazing clips: manufacturer's standard type.
.5
Lock-strip gaskets: to ASTM C542.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for glazing installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of
obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
.5
3.2
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50
Page 5 of 6
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative
PREPARATION
.1
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
.2
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
.3
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3.3
INSTALLATION: INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
.1
Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual GANA Laminated Glazing
Reference Manual for glazing installation methods.
.2
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above
sight line.
.3
Place setting blocks at 1/3 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of
light or unit.
.5
Install removable stops, with spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at
600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
.6
Fill gaps between light and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
.7
Trim protruding tape edge.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions
.1
.2
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse/recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.5
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.1
Remove traces of primer, caulking.
.2
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
.3
Remove labels.
.4
Clean glass and mirrors using approved non-abrasive cleaner in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
Section 08 80 50
Page 6 of 6
After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
.1
.3
GLAZING
Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
.2
Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
.3
Section 09 51 99 – Acoustical Ceilings
1.2
Section 09 21 16
Page 1 of 7
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.2
Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWCI)
.1
.3
GS-11-11, 2nd Edition, Paints and Coatings.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
.2
.5
AWCI Levels of Gypsum Board Finish-97.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
.4
ASTM C475-02(2007), Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint
Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
ASTM C557-03(2009)e1, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening
Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
ASTM C840-13, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
ASTM C954-11, Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs
From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.
ASTM C1002-07 (2013), Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping
Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to
Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
ASTM C1047-09, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard
and Gypsum Veneer Base.
ASTM C1280-13a, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
ASTM C1178/C1178M-13, Standard Specification for Glass Mat WaterResistant Gypsum Backing Board.
ASTM C1396/C1396M-13a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2013, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S102-07, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials and Assemblies.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 2 of 7
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit duplicate 300 mm long samples of corner and casing beads, shadow
mould, cornice cap, insulating strip.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
.2
.3
1.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
gypsum board assemblies and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
Recycled Content:
.1
Submit listing of recycled content products used, including details of
required percentages or recycled content materials and products, showing
their costs and percentages of post-consumer post-industrial content, and
total cost of materials for project.
Low-Emitting Materials:
.1
Submit listing of adhesives and sealants paints and coatings used in
building, showing compliance with VOC and chemical component limits
or restriction requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store gypsum board assemblies materials level off ground indoors in dry location
and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, wellventilated area.
Store and protect gypsum board assemblies from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Protect from weather, elements and damage from construction operations.
Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
.6
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 3 of 7
Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating. Do
not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to
sunlight or weather.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan/Waste Reduction Workplan related to
Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Maintain temperature 10 degrees C minimum, 21 degrees C maximum for 48 hours prior
to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for 48 hours
minimumafter completion of joint treatment.
.2
Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.
.3
Ventilation: ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would
prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Standard board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X, 16 mm thick unless otherwise
indicated, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges bevelled.
.2
Glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing board: to ASTM C1178/C1178M, 16 mm
thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length.
.3
Drywall furring channels: 0.5 mm core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw
attachment of gypsum board.
.4
Resilient clips and drywall furring : 0.5 mm base steel thickness galvanized steel for
resilient attachment of gypsum board.
.5
Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002.
.6
Casing beads, corner beads, control joints, drywall reveal trim, edge trim: to ASTM
C1047, zinc-coated by hot-dip process, 0.5 mm base thickness, perforated flanges, one
piece length per location.
.7
Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
.1
.2
VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
Acoustic sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
.8
Noise stop foam seal, continuous, 3 mm thick x 45 mm wide, with self sticking
permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.
.9
Joint compound: to ASTM C475, asbestos-free.
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Section 09 21 16
Page 4 of 7
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for gypsum board assemblies installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative
ERECTION
.1
Do application and finishing of gypsum board to ASTM C840 except where specified
otherwise.
.2
Do application of gypsum sheathing to ASTM C1280.
.3
Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings to ASTM C840
except where specified otherwise.
.4
Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm
of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.
.5
Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200.
.6
Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, .
.7
Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud
partition header track.
.8
Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings.
.9
Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum
areas as indicated.
.10
Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes to ASTM C840, except where
specified otherwise.
.11
Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, , on four sides.
Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.12
Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.
.13
Erect drywall resilient furring transversely across studs and joists between the layers of
gypsum board, spaced maximum 600 mm on centre and not more than 150 mm from
ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm drywall screw.
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply gypsum board after bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and
mechanical work have been approved.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 5 of 7
Apply single layer gypsum board to wood metal furring or framing using screw fasteners.
Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm on centre.
.1
Single-Layer Application:
.1
Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls to ASTM
C840.
.2
Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally, providing sheet lengths
that will minimize end joints.
.3
Apply glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing board where wall tiles to be applied.
Apply water-resistant sealant to edges, ends, cut-outs which expose gypsum core and to
fastener heads. Do not apply joint treatment on areas to receive tile finish.
.4
Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each
face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed
building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes, ducts, , in
partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant.
.5
Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger
end joints at least 250 mm.
.6
Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar
high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where
local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.
.7
Install gypsum board with face side out.
.8
Do not install damaged or damp boards.
.9
Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of wall.
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces
where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit
corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure using contact adhesive for full length at
150 mm on centre.
.2
Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings.
.3
Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing
junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant.
.4
Provide paintable metal drywall reveal trim at all junctions of new partitions and existing
exposed concrete walls or columns, on both sides of partition.
.5
Construct control joints of preformed units set in gypsum board facing and supported
independently on both sides of joint.
.6
Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.
.7
Locate control joints where indicated, at changes in substrate construction at approximate
10 m spacing on long corridor runs and at approximately 15 m spacing on ceilings.
.8
Install control joints straight and true.
.9
Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints.
Provide continuous dust barrier.
Project No. R.067898.002
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 6 of 7
.10
Install expansion joint straight and true.
.11
Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws.
.12
Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections.
.1
Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.
.13
Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint
compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's
directions and feathered out onto panel faces.
.14
Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in
accordance with AWCI Levels of Gypsum Board Finish:
.1
Levels of finish:
.1
Level 1- above-ceiling plenum barriers: embed tape for joints and
interior angles in joint compound. Surfaces to be free of excess joint
compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
.2
Level 2 – tile backer board: embed tape for joints and interior angles in
joint compound and apply one separate coat of joint compound over
joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess
joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
.3
Level 5 – all other areas: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint
compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints,
angles, fastener heads and accessories; apply a thin skim coat of joint
compound to entire surface; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and
ridges.
.15
Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound
and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.
.16
Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent
surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.
.17
Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent
surface of board.
.18
Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects
and ready for surface finish.
.19
Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping.
.20
Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broad knife to fill surface texture
differences, variations or tool marks.
.21
Allow skim coat to dry completely.
.22
Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth.
3.5
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
.2
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
Section 09 21 16
Page 7 of 7
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.6
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by gypsum board assemblies installation.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 09 22 16
Page 1 of 4
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.2
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
.1
.2
.3
Architectural Painting Specification Manual - current edition.
.1
MPI #26, Primer, Galvanized Metal, Cementitious.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
1.3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
The Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1
.5
CCD-047-98(R2005), Architectural Surface Coatings.
CCD-048-95(R2006), Surface Coatings - Recycled Water-Borne.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.4
ASTM C645-13, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing
Members.
ASTM C754-11, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Product Data:
.1
.4
Submit drawings stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the
Province of Ontario, Canada
Indicate framing for partitions below and above existing ceilings as well as
lateral support framing required to support partitions independant of existing
suspended ceiling system, to which the partition assembly will not be fastened.
Indicate member design thickness exclusive of coatings, connection and bracing
details, screw sizing and spacing, and anchors
Indicate locations, dimensions, openings and requirements of related work
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
metal framing and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Samples:
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.5
Section 09 22 16
Page 2 of 4
Submit duplicate 300 mm long samples of non-structural metal framing.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
1.4
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
.3
Recycled Content:
.1
Submit listing of recycled content products used, including
details of required percentages or recycled content materials and
products, showing their costs and percentages of post-consumer
post-industrial content, and total cost of materials for project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.3
Site review and Post-Installation Certification: Engineer who stamped shop drawings
shall provide periodic site review and reports, progress billing review and reports, and
signed and stamped certification that the work of this Section has been performed in
conformance with shop drawings.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect metal framing from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan related to
Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Section 09 22 16
Page 3 of 4
Non-load bearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645, 92 mm stud size unless
otherwise indicated, thickness as required by engineered shop drawings, roll formed, hot
dipped galvanized steel sheet, for screw attachment of gypsum board.
.1
Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres.
.2
Floor and ceiling tracks: to ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32 mm flange
height.
.3
Metal channel stiffener: 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibitive
coating.
.4
Acoustical sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
.5
Noise stop foam seal, continuous, 3 mm thick x 45 mm wide, with self sticking
permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for non-structural metal framing application in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative
ERECTION
.1
Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm on centre maximum.
.2
Place studs vertically at 600 mm on centre and not more than 50 mm from abutting
walls, and at each side of openings and corners.
.1
Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to
provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000.
.4
Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When
erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.5
Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special
supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.
.6
Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than
stud centres specified.
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.7
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Section 09 22 16
Page 4 of 4
Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other approved means
of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips.
Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to
accommodate intermediate studs.
.1
.2
Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing
as wall studs.
.8
Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides.
Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.9
Provide 40 mm stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures
behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab
bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions.
.10
Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other
boxes.
.11
Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings.
.12
Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural
loads to studs.
.1
.13
3.3
Use 50 mm leg ceiling tracks. Use double track slip joint as required.
Install insulating strip under studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control
partitions.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.4
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by non-structural metal framing application.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
CERAMIC TILING
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 09 30 13
Page 1 of 4
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Ceramic Tile Institute (CTI)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
.2
.3
.4
CAN/CSA-A3000-03(R2006), Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of
A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State
.1
.6
CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86(R1988), Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in
Building Construction.
CGSB 71-GP-22M-78(AMEND.), Adhesive, Organic, for Installation of
Ceramic Wall Tile.
CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88, Tile, Ceramic.
CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer for Floors.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.5
ASTM C144-04, Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C207-06, Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C847-06, Specification for Metal Lath.
ASTM C979-05, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Coloured Concrete.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.4
ANSI A108.1-99, Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes
ANSI A108.1A-C, 108.4-.13, A118.1-.10, ANSI A136.1).
CTI A118.3-92, Specification for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile
Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive
(included in ANSI A108.1).
CTI A118.4-92, Specification for Latex Cement Mortar (included in ANSI
A108.1).
CTI A118.5-92, Specification for Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortars and
Grouts for Tile Installation (included in ANSI A108.1).
CTI A118.6-92, Specification for Ceramic Tile Grouts (included in ANSI
A108.1).
SCAQMD Rule 1168-05, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC)
.1
.2
Tile Specification Guide 09 30 00 2006/2007, Tile Installation Manual.
Tile Maintenance Guide 2000.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.3
CERAMIC TILING
Section 09 30 13
Page 2 of 4
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
.3
Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
.2
1.4
Include manufacturer's information on:
.1
Ceramic tile, marked to show each type, size, and shape required.
.2
Chemical resistant mortar and grout (Epoxy and Furan).
.3
Cementitious backer unit.
.4
Dry-set cement mortar and grout.
.5
Divider strip.
.6
Elastomeric membrane and bond coat.
.7
Reinforcing tape.
.8
Levelling compound.
.9
Latex cement mortar and grout.
.10
Commercial cement grout.
.11
Organic adhesive.
.12
Slip resistant tile.
.13
Waterproofing isolation membrane.
.14
Fasteners.
Wall tile: submit duplicate, 300 x 300 mm sample panels of each colour, texture,
size, and pattern of tile.
Adhere tile samples to 11 mm thick plywood and grout joints to represent project
installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality Assurance Submittals:
.1
.2
1.5
Manufacturer's Instructions: manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
1.6
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements.
Separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21
- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at ceramic tile installation area
above 12 degrees C for 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after, installation.
.2
Do not install tiles at temperatures less than 12 degrees C or above 38 degrees C.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
1.7
CERAMIC TILING
Section 09 30 13
Page 3 of 4
Do not apply epoxy mortar and grouts at temperatures below 15 degrees C or above 25
degrees C.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
.3
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
Provide minimum 2% of each type and colour of tile required for project for
maintenance use. Store where directed.
Maintenance material same production run as installed material.
Part 2
Products
2.1
WALL TILE
.1
2.2
Ceramic tile: to CAN/CGSB-75.1, Type 3, Class MR , 150 x 75 mm size, edges,
glazed, surface, pattern, colour as selected by Departmental Representative.
BOND COAT
.1
Epoxy bond coat: non-toxic, non-flammable, non-hazardous during storage, mixing,
application, and when cured. To produce shock and chemical resistant mortars having the
following physical characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.3
Compressive Strength: 246 kg/cm2.
Bond Strength: 53 kg/cm2.
Water Absorption: 4.0% Max.
Ozone Resistance, 200 hours @ 200 ppm: no loss of strength.
Smoke Contribution Factor: 0.
Flame Contribution Factor: 0.
Finished mortar and grout to be resistant to urine, dilute acid, dilute alkali, sugar,
brine and food waste products, petroleum distillates, oil and aromatic solvents.
Bond Coat: maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
GROUT
.1
Colouring Pigments:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.
Colouring pigments to be added to grout by manufacturer.
Job coloured grout are not acceptable.
Use in Commercial Cement Grout, Dry-Set Grout, and Latex Cement Grout.
Cement Grout: to ANSI A108.1.
.1
Use one part white cement to one part white sand passing a number 30 screen.
.3
Commercial Cement Grout: to CTI A118.6.
.4
Dry-Set Grout: to CTI A118.6.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
CERAMIC TILING
Latex Cement Grout: to ANSI A108.1, fast curing, high early strength, polymermodified, stain resistant, sanded mix for floors, unsanded mix for walls and floors with
polished tiles commercial tile grout.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 09 30 13
Page 4 of 4
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
WORKMANSHIP
.1
Do tile work in accordance with TTMAC Tile Installation Manual 2006/2007, "Ceramic
Tile", except where specified otherwise.
.2
Apply tile or backing coats to clean and sound surfaces.
.3
Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain
uniform joint appearance. Cut edges smooth and even. Do not split tiles.
.4
Maximum surface tolerance 1:800.
.5
Make joints between tile uniform and approximately 1.5 mm wide, plumb, straight, true,
even and flush with adjacent tile. Ensure sheet layout not visible after installation. Align
patterns.
.6
Lay out tiles so perimeter tiles are minimum 1/2 size.
.7
Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow-sounding units to obtain full bond.
.8
Make internal angles square, external angles rounded bullnosed.
.9
Install divider strips at junction of tile flooring and dissimilar materials.
.10
Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles, before grouting.
.11
Clean installed tile surfaces after installation and grouting cured.
3.3
WALL TILE
.1
3.4
Install in accordance with TTMAC
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
3.5
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
.2
Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
1.2
Section 09 51 99
Page 1 of 5
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.3
SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2013, Architectural Coatings.
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
.6
GS-11-11, 2nd Edition, Paints and Coatings.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.5
CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
.4
ASTM C635/C635M-13a, Standard Specifications for the Manufacture,
Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
ASTM C636/C636M-13, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
ASTM E1477-98a(2013), Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance
Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
CAN/ULC-S102-2007, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
ceiling panels and ceiling suspension system and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 Health and Safety Requirements 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
.4
.4
Engineer who stamped shop drawings shall provide periodic site review and
reports and progress billing review and stamped post-installation certification
that work of this Section in in conformance with stamped shop drawings.
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit duplicate full size samples of each type acoustical units.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
.2
.3
1.4
Submit stamped shop drawings for any replacement, reinstatement and/or
alterations made to existing acoustical ceiling grid or suspension system
Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated.
Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing method
for main and cross runners, change in level details, and acoustical unit support at
ceiling fixture lateral bracing and accessories.
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.6
Section 09 51 99
Page 2 of 5
Site Review and Post-Installation Certification:
.1
.5
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Management Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan
highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
Recycled Content:
.1
Submit listing of recycled content products used, including details of
required percentages or recycled content materials and products, showing
their costs and percentages of post-consumer post-industrial content, and
total cost of materials for project.
Low-Emitting Materials:
.1
Submit listing of touch-up paints used in building, comply with VOC and
chemical component limits or restriction requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials off ground indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store materials inside, level, under cover. Protect from weather, damage from
construction operations and other causes, in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
Handle materials to prevent damage to edges or surfaces. Protect metal
accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
.5
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 99
Page 3 of 5
Store and protect acoustic ceiling materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan related to
Work of this Section.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
COMPONENTS
.1
RH Coats Building - Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Jean Talon Building - Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
Non-Directional Pattern , Class A.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.55.
Light Reflectance (LR) range of 0.85 to ASTM E1477.
Edge type square.
Colour white
Size: varies, refer to drawings.
Thickness: 16mm
Shape flat.
Non-Directional Pattern , Class A.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.55.
Light Reflectance (LR) range of 0.85 to ASTM E1477.
Edge type square.
Colour white
Size: varies, refer to drawings. Some tiles will need to be custom-cut
Thickness: 19mm
Shape flat.
Acoustical Suspension:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Intermediate duty system to ASTM C635.
Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel, zinc
coated.
Suspension system: non fire rated, two directional exposed tee bar grid.
Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen, white colour.
Components die cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm
rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee with rectangular bulb; web extended to
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
.6
.7
.8
.4
Section 09 51 99
Page 4 of 5
form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to
provide flush intersection.
Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire, 3.6 mm diameter for access tile
ceilings.
Hanger inserts: purpose made.
Carrying channels: 38 mm channel, galvanized steel, thickness to be determined
by engineered shop drawings.
Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding flush reveal, to
complement suspension system components, as recommended by system
manufacturer.
Performance/Design Criteria:
.1
2.2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635 deflection test.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Touch-up paint: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface
conditions:
.1
Paint: VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to GS-11 SCAQMD Rule 1113.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions prior to acoustical ceiling installation.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation: in accordance with ASTM C636 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Suspension System:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Erect ceiling suspension system after work above ceiling has been inspected by
Departmental Representative Secure hangers to overhead structure using
attachment methods as indicated acceptable to Departmental Representative.
Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from
ends of main tees.
Lay out centreline of ceiling both ways, to provide balanced borders at room
perimeter with border units not less than 50% of standard unit width system
according to reflected ceiling plan.
Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
Section 09 51 99
Page 5 of 5
Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting
fixtures diffusers grilles and speakers.
Support at light fixtures diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers
within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of
fixture.
Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly.
Ensure finished ceiling system is square with adjoining walls and level within
1:1000.
Acoustic Panels:
.1
.2
3.3
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.
Co-ordinate ceiling work with work of other sections such as interior lighting,
fire protection communication, and intrusion and detection systems.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.1
3.4
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by acoustical ceiling installation.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 1
General
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.2
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State
.1
.2
1.2
INSTALL Resilient Certification
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.5
NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by
Solid Materials.
International Standards and Training Alliance (INSTALL):
.1
.4
ASTM F 2034 Standard Specification for Linoleum Sheet Floor Covering.
ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in
Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive
Resilient Flooring.
ASTM F 1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type
Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring.
ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke
Generated by Solid Materials.
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
ASTM E 492 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of lmpact
Sound Transmission through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping
Machine.
ASTM E 989 Standard Classification for Determination of lmpact lnsulation
Class (llC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
.1
.3
Section 09 65 16
Page 1 of 6
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
.2
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
SCAQMD Rule 1113-13, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-05, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Project No. R.067898.002
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Section 09 65 16
Page 2 of 6
.2
Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product
components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colours, patterns and textures.
.3
Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.4
Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of sheet material, edge and
transition strips.
.5
Certification of Compliance: provide Letter of Compliance signed by manufacturer
certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and
physical requirements.
.6
Manufacturer’s Instructions: provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
.7
Provide Manufacturer’s Field Reports specified herein.
.8
Closeout Submittals – submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in
accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Include methods for
maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods
detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Mock-ups: install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and
manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Departmental Representative’s
acceptance of finish colour, texture and pattern, and workmanship standard. Comply
with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.
.2
Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project
requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and
manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and
Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.
.3
Pre-Installation Testing: Conduct pre-installation testing as follows: Specify testing (i.e.
moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc).
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
1.5
Separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21
- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, areas to receive flooring should be clean, fully enclosed and
weathertight. The permanent HVAC must be fully operational, controlled and set at a
minimum of 20o C for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after
the installation. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner for at
least 48 hours prior to the installation. Areas to receive flooring shall be adequately
lighted to allow for proper inspection of the substrate, installation and seaming of the
flooring, and for final inspection.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
Section 09 65 16
Page 3 of 6
Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be
installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by
manufacturer.
.1
1.6
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Temperature Conditions: 20o C for a minimum of seven days prior to, during,
and seven days after the installation.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Provide extra materials of resilient sheet flooring and adhesives in accordance
with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Resilient sheet flooring to be from
same production run as products installed. Package products with protective
covering and identify with descriptive labels.
Provide 5 m2 of each colour, pattern and type flooring material required for
project for maintenance use.
Extra materials one piece and from same production run as installed materials.
Identify each roll of sheet flooring and each container of adhesive.
Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this
section.
Store where directed by Departmental Representative.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Linoleum sheet flooring: Homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials
consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto
natural jute backing. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of material.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Width: 2 Meters
Length: 32 Meters
Gauge: 2.5mm
Backing: Jute
Pattern and Color:
.1
Up to 3 colours selected by Departmental Representative
Adhesive: as recommended by manufacturer
Heat Welding Rod: as recommended by manufacturer, colour- and texturematched to floor finish
Topshield finish
Resilient base: continuous, top set, complete with premoulded end stops and external
corners:
.1
.2
.3
Type: rubber.
Style: cove.
Thickness: 3.17 mm.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
.5
.6
.3
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Section 09 65 16
Page 4 of 6
Height: 152 mm.
Lengths: cut lengths minimum 2400 mm.
Colour: colour selected by Departmental Representative
Primers and adhesives: of types recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for
specific material on applicable substrate, above, on or below grade.
.1
.2
Rubber floor adhesives:
.1
Adhesive: maximum VOC limit 60 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
Cove base adhesives:
.1
Adhesive: maximum VOC limit 50 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
.4
Sub-floor filler and leveller: white premix latex requiring water only to produce
cementitious paste 2 part latex-type filler requiring no water or as recommended by
flooring manufacturer for use with their product.
.5
Metal edge strips:
.1
Brushed stainless steel, with lips to extend under new floor finih and over edge of
existing adjacent carpet.
.6
External corner protectors: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.7
Edging to floor penetrations: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.8
Sealer and wax: type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for
material type and location.
.1
Sealer: maximum VOC limit 100 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1113.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
.1
3.3
Ensure concrete floors are clean and dry by using test methods recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
PREPARATION
.1
Remove existing carpet.
.2
Remove or treat old adhesives to prevent residual, old flooring adhesives from bleeding
through to new flooring and/or interfering with the bonding of new adhesives.
.3
Clean floor and apply filler; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit
traffic until filler cured and dry.
.4
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects
with sub-floor filler.
.5
Prime Seal concrete slab to resilient flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.4
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Section 09 65 16
Page 5 of 6
APPLICATION: FLOORING
.1
Adhesive Flooring Installation: Cut required length of linoleum flooring from roll,
allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and
position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment
joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of
vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring
into wet adhesive and roll with a 50 kg roller. Install sheet flooring square with room
axis.
.1
.2
.2
Installation Techniques:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.5
Adhesive, Seamless Flooring Installation: Rout out seams and heat weld together
with complementary colored heat welding rod of complimentary composition in
accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for specific adhesive. Spread at rate recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
Install flooring before new partitions.
Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and
built-in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and
cabinets.
Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items
occurring within finish floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers.
Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use expansion joint covers
manufactured for use with resilient flooring. Refer to other specification sections
for expansion joint covers.
Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids,
raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other
surface imperfections in completed installation.
.1
Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with flooring
manufacturer’s recommendations, including those for trowel notching,
adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
Roll resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring manufacturer.
APPLICATION: BASE
.1
Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum.
.2
Clean substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive.
.3
Apply adhesive to back of base.
.4
Set base against wall and floor surfaces tightly by using 3 kg hand roller.
.5
Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.
.6
Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush
door frames.
Project No. R.067898.002
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Section 09 65 16
Page 6 of 6
.7
Cope internal corners. Use premoulded corner units for right angle external corners. Use
formed straight base material for external corners of other angles.
.8
Use toeless type base where floor finish will be carpet, coved type elsewhere.
.9
Install toeless type base before installation of carpet on floors.
.10
Heat weld base in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
3.7
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions.
.2
Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or
replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions prior to Departmental Representative’s acceptance. Remove
construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.8
Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods
recommended by floor manufacturer.
Sweep and vacuum floor after installation.
Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Damp mop flooring to remove black marks and soil.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection.
.2
Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.
.3
Use only water-based coating for linoleum.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 1
General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section 09 91 23
Page 1 of 12
Related Requirements
.1
.2
.3
1.2
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 08 11 00 – Metal Frames
Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
REFERENCES
.1
Department of Justice Canada (Jus)
.1
.2
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
.1
.3
EPA Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of
Consumer Products, Method 24 - 1995, (for Surface Coatings).
Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.4
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1
MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual, Current Edition
.5
National Fire Code of Canada - 2010
.6
Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)
.1
.7
Transport Canada (TC)
.1
1.3
SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two, 8th Edition, Systems and Specifications
Manual.
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34 .
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Mock-Ups:
.1
Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
Provide one room mock-up. Prepare and paint designated room (in each
colour scheme) to specified requirements, with specified paint or coating
showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures.
.2
Mock-up will be used:
.1
To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of
equipment and material application and workmanship to MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual standards.
.3
Locate where directed.
.4
Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
.2
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality
required for this work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of
finished work.
Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this
Section.
.1
Verify project requirements.
.2
Review installation and substrate conditions.
.3
Coordination with other building subtrades.
.4
Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
Health and Safety:
.1
1.4
Section 09 91 23
Page 2 of 12
Pre-Installation Meeting:
.1
.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.
SCHEDULING
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for
review. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations.
.2
Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for changes in work
schedule.
.3
Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants.
1.5
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Submit product data and instructions for each paint and coating product to be
used, clearly identifying the MPI product number and paint system to which it
belongs.
Submit product data for the use and application of paint thinner.
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Indicate VOCs during application and curing.
Samples:
.1
.2
Submit full range colour sample chips to indicate where colour availability is
restricted.
Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint with specified paint
or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on following substrate
materials:
.1
3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces.
.2
13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 3 of 12
.3
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.6
50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry
surfaces.
.4
13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth
surfaces.
Retain reviewed samples on-site to demonstrate acceptable standard of quality
for appropriate on-site surface.
Test reports: submit certified test reports for paint from approved independent
testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
.1
Lead, cadmium and chromium: presence of and amounts.
.2
Mercury: presence of and amounts.
.3
Organochlorines and PCBs: presence of and amounts.
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
.1
Submit manufacturer's application instructions.
Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual
specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals include following:
.1
Product name, type and use.
.2
Manufacturer's product number.
.3
Colour numbers.
.4
MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
.3
1.7
Deliver to extra materials from same production run as products installed.
Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels.
Comply with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
Quantity: provide one - one four litre can of each type and colour of primer and
paint. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and
finish system.
Delivery, storage and protection: comply with Departmental Representative
requirements for delivery and storage of extra materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:
.1
.2
Pack, ship, handle and unload materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
Acceptance at Site:
.1
Identify products and materials with labels indicating:
.1
Manufacturer's name and address.
.2
Type of paint or coating.
.3
Compliance with applicable standard.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.
.3
Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.
.4
Storage and Protection:
.1
.2
.3
Section 09 91 23
Page 4 of 12
Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.
Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.
Store materials and equipment in well ventilated area with temperature range 7
degrees C to 30 degrees C.
.5
Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by
manufacturer.
.6
Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation clean and orderly. After completion
of operations, return areas to clean condition.
.7
Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.
.8
Fire Safety Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.9
Provide one 9 kg Type ABC or dry chemical fire extinguisher as recommended
by the manufacturer adjacent to storage area.
Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to
spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from
site on a daily basis.
Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in
accordance with National Fire Code of Canada requirements.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in
accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP).
Separate for reuse recycling and place in designated containers Steel Metal
Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP).
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA,
Regional and Municipal, regulations.
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.
Unused paint coating materials must be disposed of at official hazardous material
collections site as approved by Departmental Representative.
Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and
solvents) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for
disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial
Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government.
Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and
disposed of in an appropriate manner.
Project No. R.067898.002
.11
.12
.13
.14
1.8
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 5 of 12
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and
adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous
waste.
To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain
systems or into ground follow these procedures:
.1
Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be
filtered out.
.2
Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in
designated containers and ensure proper disposal.
.3
Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for
contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and
laundering.
.4
Dispose of contaminants in approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
.5
Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where
available).
Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for
delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials. Deliver to or
arrange collection by employees, individuals, or organizations for verifiable reuse or re-manufacturing.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Ventilate enclosed spaces.
Provide heating facilities to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures
above 10 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until
paint has cured sufficiently.
Provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of
paint.
Coordinate use of existing ventilation system with Departmental Representative
and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required.
Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities
are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation
and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
Provide minimum lighting level of 323 Lux on surfaces to be painted.
Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:
.1
Unless pre-approved written approval by Departmental Representative, perform
no painting when:
.1
Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C.
.2
Substrate temperature is above 32 degrees C unless paint is specifically
formulated for application at high temperatures.
.3
Substrate and ambient air temperatures are not expected to fall within
MPI or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 6 of 12
.4
.2
.3
.4
.3
Surface and Environmental Conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
The relative humidity is under 85% or when the dew point is more than 3
degrees C variance between the air/surface temperature. Paint should not
be applied if the dew point is less than 3 degrees C below the ambient or
surface temperature. Use sling psychrometer to establish the relative
humidity before beginning paint work.
.5
Ensure that conditions are within specified limits during drying or curing
process, until newly applied coating can itself withstand 'normal' adverse
environmental factors.
Perform painting work when maximum moisture content of the substrate is
below:
.1
Allow new concrete and masonry to cure minimum of 28 days.
.2
15% for wood.
.3
12% for plaster and gypsum board.
Test for moisture using calibrated electronic Moisture Meter. Test concrete floors
for moisture using "cover patch test".
Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related
construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that
airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.
Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture
limits.
Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.
Additional interior application requirements:
.1
.2
Apply paint finishes when temperature at location of installation can be
satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations.
Schedule operations to approval of Departmental Representative such that
painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are
affected.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on
this project.
.2
Provide paint materials for paint systems from single manufacturer.
.3
Only qualified products with E2 or E3 "Environmentally Friendly" rating are acceptable
for use on this project.
.4
Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior painting work including preparation and
priming.
.5
Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents,
etc.) in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual "Approved
Product" listing.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 7 of 12
.6
Linseed oil, shellac, and turpentine: highest quality product from approved manufacturer
listed in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, compatible with other coating
materials as required.
.7
Flash point: 61.0 degrees C or greater for water-borne surface coatings and recycled
water-borne surface coatings.
2.2
COLOURS
.1
Departmental Representative will provide colour schedule after contract award.
.2
Colour schedule will be based upon selection of up to 11 colours.
.3
Selection of colours from manufacturers full range of colours.
.4
Where specific products are available in restricted range of colours, selection based on
limited range.
.5
Second coat in three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show
visible difference between coats.
2.3
MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. Obtain written
approval from Departmental Representative for tinting of painting materials.
.2
Mix paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes inaccordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.3
Use and add thinner in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or similar organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
.4
Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
.5
Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
2.4
GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss is defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following
values:
Gloss Level 1 - Matte Finish
(flat)
Gloss Level 2 - Velvet-Like
Finish
Gloss Level 3 - Eggshell Finish
Gloss Level 4 - Satin-Like Finish
Gloss Level 5 - Traditional
Semi-Gloss Finish
Gloss Level 6 - Traditional Gloss
Gloss Level 7 - High Gloss
Finish
.2
Gloss @ 60 degrees
Max. 5
Sheen @ 85 degrees
Max. 10
Max.10
10 to 35
10 to 25
20 to 35
35 to 70
10 to 35
min. 35
70 to 85
More than 85
Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as indicated.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.5
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 8 of 12
INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Galvanized metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, and
ducts.
.1
.2
Dressed lumber: including doors, door and window frames, casings, mouldings:
.1
.3
INT 9.2B - High performance architectural latex, G3 walls, G 2 ceilings
Canvas and cotton coverings.
.1
2.6
INT 6.3A - High performance architectural latex, G5 finish.
Plaster and gypsum board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", and
textured finishes:
.1
.4
INT 5.3M - High performance architectural latex, G5 finish
INT 10.1A – Latex, G3 finish
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform following tests on each batch of consolidated post-consumer material before
surface coating is reformulated and canned. Testing by laboratory or facility which has
been accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
.1
.2
.3
Lead, cadmium and chromium are to be determined using ICP-AES (Inductively
Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission Spectroscopy) technique no. 6010 as defined
in EPA SW-846.
Mercury is to be determined by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy
using Technique no. 7471 as defined in EPA SW-846.
Organochlorines and PCBs are to be determined by Gas Chromatography using
Technique no. 8081 as defined in EPA SW-846.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
GENERAL
.1
Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI
Architectural Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.
.2
Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application
instructions.
3.3
EXAMINATION
.1
Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of
surfaces to be painted. Report to Departmental Representative damages, defects,
unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 9 of 12
.2
Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronic
moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using simple "cover patch test".
Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended
by manufacturer.
.3
Maximum moisture content as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.4
Stucco, plaster and gypsum board: 12%.
Concrete: 12%.
Clay and Concrete Block/Brick: 12%.
Wood: 15%.
PREPARATION
.1
Protection:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Surface Preparation:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters,
markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If
damaged, clean and restore surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative.
Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and
frames.
Protect factory finished products and equipment.
Protect building occupants and general public in and about the building.
Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath
accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to
undertaking painting operations. Identify and store items in secure location and
re-installed after painting is completed.
Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out
painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress.
Place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas as painting operations progress.
Signs to approval of Departmental Representative.
Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specification
Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as
follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean
cloths or compressed air.
Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and
clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface
contaminants.
Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from
surface.
Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.
Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in
place of organic solvents.
Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.
Project No. R.067898.002
.7
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 10 of 12
Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. Minimize
use of mineral spirits or organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.
.4
Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive
chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications
of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after
cleaning and before deterioration occurs.
.5
Where possible, prime non-exposed surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation.
Use same primers as specified for exposed surfaces.
.1
.2
.3
Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas.
Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks.
Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork.
.6
Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and
to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.
.7
Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt,
oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove
traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with
clean brushes blowing with clean dry compressed air and/or vacuum cleaning.
.8
Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified.
.9
Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental
Representative.
3.5
APPLICATION
.1
Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint
by brush or roller. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified
otherwise.
.2
Brush and Roller Application:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Apply paint in uniform layer using brush and/or roller type suitable for
application.
Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.
Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using daubers and/or
sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush,
daubers or sheepskins.
Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces free of
roller tracking and heavy stipple.
Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.
.3
Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of
difficult access.
.4
Apply coats of paint continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare
areas before next coat of paint is applied.
.5
Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for
minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.
.6
Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 11 of 12
.7
Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces,
including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.
.8
Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces.
.9
Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.
.10
Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.
3.6
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1
Paint finished area exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical
and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as
indicated.
.2
Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers,
ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment.
.3
Other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other
mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
.4
Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as
supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
.5
Do not paint over nameplates.
.6
Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
.7
Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with primer
and one coat of matt black paint.
.8
Paint fire protection piping red.
.9
Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
.10
Paint natural gas piping yellow.
.11
Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before
installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint
conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.
.12
Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.
3.7
SITE TOLERANCES
.1
Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.
.2
Ceilings: no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface when viewed using final
lighting source.
.3
Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Standard of Acceptance:
.1
.2
.3
Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degreesto surface.
Ceilings: no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees degrees to surface when
viewed using final lighting source.
Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full
surface area.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 12 of 12
.2
Advise Departmental Representative when surfaces and applied coating is ready for
inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.
.3
Cooperate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work.
.4
Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted
MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative.
3.9
RESTORATION
.1
Clean and re-install hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.
.2
Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations
cease.
.3
Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and
spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.
.4
Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of
Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.
.5
Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition
as approved by Departmental Representative.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
Part 1
General
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State
.1
1.2
Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of
Consumer Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings).
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.4
Maintenance Repainting Manual, current edition, Master Painters Institute (MPI),
including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved Product
List.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
.1
.3
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 1 of 11
The Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1
.2
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
SCAQMD Rule 1113-13, Architectural Coatings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior repainting work including cleaning,
preparation and priming.
.2
Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners and
solvents) shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List
and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
.3
Paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, reducers and turpentine shall be the highest
quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Maintenance Repainting
Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.
.4
Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted
MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: when viewed using final lighting source surfaces shall indicate
the following:
.1
.2
.3
.6
Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.
Ceilings: no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface.
Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and sheen across full surface area.
Mock-ups: construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
.2
Provide a mock-up in accordance with requirements of Section 01 45 00 Quality Control to Departmental Representative approval.
Prepare and repaint mock-up designated interior room, to requirements specified
herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen,
textures and workmanship to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual standards for
review and approval.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
1.3
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 2 of 11
When approved, repainted room, surface and/or item shall become acceptable
standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site interior repainting
work.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Environmental Performance Requirements:
.1
1.4
Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 or E3
ratings based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels..
SCHEDULING
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for
approval.
.2
Paint occupied facilities in accordance with approved schedule. Schedule operations to
approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and
cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.
.3
Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for changes in work
schedule.
.4
Schedule repainting operations to prevent disruption by other trades if applicable and by
occupants in and about building.
1.5
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for each
paint and coating product to be used in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
.2
.3
Closeout Submittals:
.1
1.6
Submit full range colour sample chips for review and selection. Indicate where
colour availability is restricted.
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets for paint and coating
materials in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.1
Submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish
system and include following:
.1
Product name, type and use (i.e. materials and location).
.2
Manufacturer's product number.
.3
Colour code numbers.
.4
MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating.
.5
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements , supplemented as follows:.
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.2
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 3 of 11
Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact.
Labels to indicate:
.1
Manufacturer's name and address.
.2
Type of paint or coating.
.3
Compliance with applicable standard.
.4
Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.
Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.
Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Store materials and equipment in secure, dry, well-ventilated area with
temperature range between 7 degrees C to 30 degrees C. Store materials and
supplies away from heat generating devices and sensitive products above
minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer.
Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to
approval of Departmental Representative. After completion of operations, return
areas to clean condition to approval of Departmental Representative.
Remove paint materials from storage in quantities required for same day use.
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous
materials.
Fire Safety Requirements:
.1
Provide one 9 kg Type ABC or dry chemical fire extinguisher as
recommended by manufacturer adjacent to storage area.
.2
Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to
spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove
from site daily.
.3
Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials
in accordance with National Fire Code of Canada.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21
- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and
solvents) are hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal.
Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of
Environment and Regional levels of Government.
Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed
of in an appropriate manner.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and
adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous
waste.
To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain
systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
.1
Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be
filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining
water.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 4 of 11
.2
.6
.7
1.7
Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in
designated containers and ensure proper disposal.
.3
Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for
contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and
laundering.
.4
Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
.5
Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where
available).
.6
Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and
adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at
moderate temperature.
Where paint recycling is available, collect waste materials by type and provide
for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials: . Deliver to or
arrange collection by employees, individuals, or organizations for verifiable reuse or re-manufacturing.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Do not perform repainting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate
temperatures above 10 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and after paint
application and until paint has cured sufficiently.
Ventilate enclosed spaces. Where required, provide continuous ventilation for
seven days after completion of application of paint.
Co-ordinate use of existing ventilation system with Departmental Representative
and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required.
Do not perform painting work unless minimum lighting level of 323Lux is
provided on surfaces to be painted.
Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:
.1
.2
.3
Unless specifically pre-approved Departmental Representative and applied
product manufacturer, do not perform repainting work when:
.1
Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C.
.2
Substrate temperature is over 32 degrees C unless paint is specifically
formulated for application at high temperatures.
.3
Relative humidity within area to be repainted is above 85%.
Conduct moisture tests using properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter,
except use simple "cover patch test" on concrete floors to be repainted.
Do not perform repainting work when maximum moisture content of substrate
exceeds:
.1
12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block).
.2
15% for wood.
.3
12% for plaster and gypsum board.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
.3
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 5 of 11
Test painted concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
Surface and Environmental Conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.8
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related
construction operations or when ventilation conditions are such that airborne
particles will not affect quality of finished surface.
Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture
limits noted herein.
Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured, unless
otherwise pre-approved by specific coating manufacturer.
Schedule operations to approval of the Departmental Representative such that
painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are
affected.
Test all existing paint surfaces to determine if latex or alkyd and provide plans
marked up to indicate location of existing alkyd surfaces at time of submitting
action and information submittals, highlighting existing surfaces whose type
(alkyd/latex) is not as indicated in tender documents.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials:
.2
Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.3
Submit one - four litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify type and
colour in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in latest edition of MPI Approved Product List (APL) are
acceptable for use on this project.
.2
Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, paints and coatings to provide a fire
resistant rating.
.3
Paint materials for repaint systems to be products of single manufacturer.
.4
Only qualified products with MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 or E3 rating are
acceptable for use on this project.
2.2
COLOURS
.1
Departmental Representative will provide colour schedule after contract award.
.2
Colour schedule will be based upon selection of up to 11 colours.
.3
Selection of colours from manufacturers full range of colours.
.4
Where specific products are available in restricted range of colours, selection based on
limited range.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
2.3
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 6 of 11
First coat in two coat (Premium) repaint system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than
top coat to show visible difference between coats.
MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of
painting materials is allowed with Departmental Representative's written permission.
.2
Mix paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.3
Where thinner is used, addition not to exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do
not use kerosene or such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
.4
Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer' instructions. If directions
are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy
of instructions to Departmental Representative.
.5
Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
2.4
GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following MPI
gloss / sheen standard values:
Gloss Level Category
G1 - matte finish
G2 - velvet finish
G3 - eggshell finish
G4 - satin finish
G5 - semi-gloss finish
G6 - gloss finish
G7 - high gloss finish
.2
2.5
Units @ 60 Degrees
0 to 5
0 to 10
10 to 25
20 to 35
35 to 70
70 to 85
85
Units @ 85 Degrees
maximum 10
10 to 35
10 to 35
minimum 35
Gloss level ratings of repainted surfaces shall be as specified herein as noted on Finish
Schedule.
INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
RIN 4.2 - Concrete Masonry Units: (Concrete Block and Concrete Brick).
.1
.2
RIN 5.1 (modified) - Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: convector covers
.1
.3
RIN 4.2K - High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G 5 finish
RIN 5.1R – High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G5 finish,
modified to use MPI 17 as full primer coat - clean and de-gloss existing surface
prior to application. Allow 24 hours minimum drying time after application of
primer coat.
RIN 5.3 - Galvanized Metal: Doors, Frames, Railings, Pipes, etc.
.1
RIN 5.3B - High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G5 finish
.1
When painting over existing alkyd paint, modify system to use MPI 17
as full primer coat - clean and de-gloss existing surface prior to
application. Allow 24 hours minimum drying time after application of
primer coat
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
RIN 6.3T – High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G5 finish
.1
When painting over existing alkyd paint, modify system to use MPI 17
as full primer coat - clean and de-gloss existing surface prior to
application. Allow 24 hours minimum drying time after application of
primer coat
RIN 9.2 - Plaster and Gypsum Board: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, and "sheet rock type
material".
.1
.7
RIN 5.4F – High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G5 finish
RIN 6.3 - Dressed Lumber: (Including Doors, Door and Window Frames, and
Mouldings).
.1
.6
RIN 9.2B - High Performance Architectural Latex, Premium Grade, G3 finish
(walls), G2 finish (ceilings)
RIN 10.1 - Canvas and Cotton Coverings (Pipe and Duct Coverings).
.1
RIN 10.1A – Latex, Premium Grade, G3 finish
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 7 of 11
RIN 5.4 Aluminum:
.1
.5
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
EXAMINATION
.1
Interior surfaces requiring repainting: inspected by painting contractor who will notify
Departmental Representative in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing
repainting work, or after surface preparation if unseen substrate damage is discovered.
.2
Where an assessed degree of surface degradation of DSD-1 to DSD-3 before preparation
of surfaces for repainting is revealed to be DSD-4 after preparation, repair or replacement
of such unforeseen defects discovered are to be corrected, as mutually agreed, before
repainting is started.
.3
Where "special" repainting or recoating system applications (i.e. elastomeric coatings) or
non-MPI listed products or systems are to be used, paint or coating manufacturer to
provide as part of work, certification of surfaces and conditions for specific paint or
coating system application as well as on site supervision, inspection and approval of their
paint or coating system application as required at no additional cost to Departmental
Representative.
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI
Maintenance Repainting Manual requirements except where otherwise specified.
.2
Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application
instructions.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 8 of 11
Clean and prepare interior surfaces to be repainted in accordance with MPI Maintenance
Repainting Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements
and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Remove dust, dirt, and surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean
cloths or compressed air.
Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and
clean warm water using stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and surface
contaminants.
Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from
surface.
Allow surfaces to drain completely and to dry thoroughly. Allow sufficient
drying time and test surfaces using an electronic moisture meter before
commencing work.
Use water-based cleaners in place of organic solvents where surfaces will be
repainted using water based paints.
Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. Minimize
use of kerosene or such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.
.4
Clean metal surfaces to be repainted by removing rust, dirt, oil, grease and foreign
substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove such contaminates from
surfaces, pockets and corners to be repainted by brushing with clean brushes, blowing
with clean dry compressed air, or brushing/vacuum cleaning as required. Existing metal
convector covers shall be sanded to remove existing gloss.
.5
Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive
chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before priming and between applications of remaining
coats. Touch-up, spot prime, and apply primer, paint, or pre-treatment as soon as
possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.
.6
Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental
Representative.
.7
Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and
to remove defects visible from distance up to 1000 mm.
3.4
EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1
Prior to commencing work, examine site conditions and existing interior substrates to be
repainted. Report in writing to Departmental Representative damages, defects, or
unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect this work.
.2
Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronic
moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using simple "cover patch test"
and report findings to Departmental Representative. Maximum moisture content not to
exceed specified limits.
.3
Do not commence until such adverse conditions and defects have been corrected and
surfaces and conditions are acceptable to Painting Subcontractor and Inspection Agency.
.4
Degree of surface deterioration (DSD) to be assessed using MPI Identifiers and
Assessment criteria indicated in MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. MPI DSD ratings
and descriptions are as follows:
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Condition
DSD-0
Description
Sound Surface ( includes visual (aesthetic) defects
that do not affect film's protective properties).
Slightly Deteriorated Surface (indicating fading;
gloss reduction, slight surface contamination,
minor pin holes scratches).
Moderately Deteriorated Surface (small areas of
peeling, flaking, slight cracking, and staining).
Severely Deteriorated Surface (heavy peeling,
flaking, cracking, checking, scratches, scuffs,
abrasion, small holes and gouges).
Substrate Damage (repair or replacement of
surface required).
DSD-1
DSD-2
DSD-3
DSD-4
3.5
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 9 of 11
PROTECTION
.1
Protect existing surfaces and adjacent fixtures and furnishings from paint spatters,
markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged,
clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.
.3
Protect factory finished products and equipment.
.4
Protect general public and building occupants in and about building.
.5
Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath accessories
and surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking re-painting
operations. Store items and re-install after painting is completed.
.6
Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out repainting
operations. Replace as painting operations progress.
.7
As repainting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas to
approval of Departmental Representative.
3.6
APPLICATION
.1
Apply paint by method that is best suited for substrate being repainted using brush or
roller. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.
Methods of application as pre-approved by Departmental Representative before
commencing work.
.2
Brush and Roller Application:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Apply paint in uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for
application.
Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.
Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or
sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush,
daubers or sheepskins.
Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces free of
roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Departmental
Representative.
Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.
Project No. R.067898.002
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 10 of 11
.3
Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers when no other method is practical in places of
difficult access and when specifically authorized by Departmental Representative.
.4
Apply paint coats in continuous manner and allow surfaces to dry and properly cure
between coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. Minimum
dry film thickness of coats not less than that recommended by manufacturer. Repaint
thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.
.5
Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.
.6
Repaint surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces,
including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.
.7
Repaint top, bottom, and vertical edges of doors to be repainted.
.8
Repaint inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces.
.9
Repaint closets and alcoves to match existing, unless otherwise scheduled or noted.
3.7
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1
Unless otherwise noted, repainting to include exposed to view / previously painted
mechanical and electrical equipment and components (panels, conduits, piping, hangers,
and ductwork.).
.2
Touch up scratches and marks and repaint such mechanical and electrical equipment and
components with colour, and sheen finish to match existing unless otherwise noted or
scheduled.
.3
Do not paint over name plates or instruction labels.
.4
Leave unfinished exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish.
.5
Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
.6
Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: when viewed using natural prevailing sunlight at peak period of
day (mid-day) on surface viewed, surfaces to indicate following:
.1
.2
.3
3.8
Walls: no defects visible from distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.
Soffits: no defects visible from grade at 45 degrees to surface.
Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and sheen across full surface area.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Inspection:
.2
Advise Departmental Representative when each surface and applied coating is ready for
inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.
3.9
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions, supplemented as
follows:.
.1
Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses
using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.10
INTERIOR RE-PAINTING
Section 09 91 23.01
Page 11 of 11
Keep work area free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
materials and debris.
Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely
dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Clean equipment and dispose of wash water used for water borne materials,
solvents used for oil based materials as well as other cleaning and protective
materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, and masking papers), paints, thinners, paint
removers/strippers in accordance with safety requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and as noted herein.
Clean painting equipment in leak-proof containers that will permit particulate
matter to settle out and be collected. Sediment remaining from cleaning
operations to be recycled or disposed of in manner acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Recycle paint and coatings in excess of repainting requirements as specified.
RESTORATION
.1
Clean and re-install hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.
.2
Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations
cease.
.3
Remove paint splashings on affected exposed surfaces. Remove smears and spatter
immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.
.4
Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of
Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.
.5
Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition
as approved by Departmental Representative.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Part 1
General
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
.2
Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
1.2
Section 10 22 26.33
Page 1 of 5
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
.2
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
.3
.3
FSC-STD-01-001-2004, FSC Principle and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.
FSC-STD-20-002-2004, Structure and Content of Forest Stewardship Standards
V2-1.
FSC Accredited Certification Bodies.
Underwriters Laboratories' of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.3
CSA O115-M1982(R2001), Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
CSA O151-04, Canadian Softwood Plywood.
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
.1
.2
.6
CAN/CGSB-11.3-M87, Hardboard.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.5
ASTM E90-04, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
ASTM E336-05, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound
Insulation in Buildings.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.4
ANSI A208.1-09, Particleboard, Mat-Formed Wood.
ANSI A208.2-09, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Application.
CAN/ULC-S102-03, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Design and fabricate folding partitions with minimum STC of 45 tested to ASTM E90.
.2
Operation of partition shall not require a force of more than 22 N.
1.4
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
Project No. R.067898.002
.1
.2
.3
Submit duplicate 300 x 300mm samples of partition finish for each colour
selected.
Include statement indicating total cost of mechanical and electrical components.
Quality assurance/control submittals: submit following in accordance with Section
01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.7
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.1
Include plans, sections, details, attachments to other construction.
Indicate installation requirements including dimensions, head and jamb
conditions, track layout and support, stacking arrangement, switching,
hardware, finish and colour, operating mechanism, and location.
Indicate blocking to be provided by others.
Submit Project Materials and Cost Data: provide statement for total cost for building
materials used for project.
.1
.6
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section
02 81 01 - Hazardous Materials.
Samples:
.1
.5
Section 10 22 26.33
Page 2 of 5
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Test reports: submit certified test reports for folding panel partitions from
approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with
specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Submit test data indicating compliance with design requirements regarding sound
transmission and fire hazard classification.
Submit acoustical test data to ASTM E90 and ensure construction details and
weight are provided.
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures and .
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
Site review and Post-Installation Certification: Engineer who stamped shop
drawings shall provide periodic site review and reports, progress billing review
and reports, and signed and stamped certification that the work of this Section
has been performed in conformance with shop drawings.
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for folding panel partitions for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Section 10 22 26.33
Page 3 of 5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Forest Certification: provide operable panel partitions made from wood obtained from
forests certified by FSC accredited certification body to comply with FSC-STD-01-001.
.2
Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Services described in PART 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed.
.1
.2
.3
1.6
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work is complete
but before installation begins.
Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60%complete.
Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Panel Construction:
.1
.2
.3
2.2
Panel Core: Nominal 76 mm thick panels in manufacturer's standard 1220 mm
widths. All panel horizontal and vertical framing members fabricated from
minimum 1.2 mm formed steel with overlapped and welded corners for rigidity.
Top channel is reinforced to support suspension system components. Frame is
designed so that full vertical edges of panels are of formed steel and provide
concealed protection of the edges of the panel skin.
Panel Skin: 13 mm tackable moisture resistant gypsum board, class “A” rated
single material or composite layers continuously bonded to panel frame.
Acoustical ratings of panels with this construction 45 STC
Panel Finishes:
.1
Panel Trim: exposed panel trim of one consistent colour from
Manufacturer's standard range
.2
Panel face finish shall be reinforced vinyl with woven backing weighing
not less than 648 g per lineal metre, colour to Departmental
Representative's selection from standard colour range
COMPONENTS
.1
Overhead suspension system:
.1
.2
.3
Suspension Tracks: Minimum 3 mm roll-formed steel track, suitable for either
direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel hanger
brackets, supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural
support by pairs of 9.5 mm diameter threaded rods. Aluminum track is not
acceptable.
Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white.
Carriers: One all-steel trolley with steel-tired ball-bearing wheels per panel
(except hinged panels). Non-steel tires are not acceptable.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.2
Full leaf butt hinges, attached directly to panel frame with welded hinge anchor
plates within panel.
Sound seals:
.1
.2
.3
2.3
Equip partition with manufacturer's standard hardware. Hardware finish selected
from manufacturer's standard finishes.
Install standard latch.
Hinges:
.1
.4
Section 10 22 26.33
Page 4 of 5
Hardware:
.1
.3
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Roll-formed steel astragals,
with reversible tongue and groove configuration in each panel edge for universal
panel operation. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not
acceptable.
Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of
non-contacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion without the need for
mechanically operated parts.
Horizontal Bottom Seals: automatic operable seals providing nominal 51 mm
operating clearance with an operating range of +13 mm to -38 mm which
automatically drop as panels are positioned, without the need for tools or cranks.
ACCESSORIES
.1
2.4
Provide manufacturer's standard stack jamb closure panel, with lever operator.
OPERATION
.1
Partition is a series of paired flat panels hinged together in pairs, manually operated, topsupported with operable floor seals
.2
Final closure: horizontally expanding panel edge with removable crank.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Secure and level track.
.2
Install folding partitions in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.3
Touch up damaged finishes, repair damage to partitions to match original finish.
.4
Clean folding partition system and protect from damage.
.5
Adjust and leave partitions in smooth operating condition.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Section 10 22 26.33
Page 5 of 5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests:
.1
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
3.4
Acoustic field testing: have field sound performance certified byindependent
acoustical consultant in accordance with ASTM E336.
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions
.2
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
Project No. R.067898.002
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND SAFETY BLANKETS
Section 10 44 16.19
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA (Fire) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2007 Edition.
.3
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC S508-02, Standard for the Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers, Including
Amendments 1 and 2.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheet and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 00 10 General Instructions.
.3
Provide shop drawings.
.4
Quality control submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria,
installation sequence, cleaning procedures and.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit manufacturer's written reports within 3 days of review, verifying
compliance of Work, as described in PART 3, FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.5
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND SAFETY BLANKETS
Section 10 44 16.19
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MULTI-PURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS
.1
2.2
Cartridge operated type or Stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labelled for
A, B and C class protection.
.1
Size 2.25 kg.
IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of ANSI/NFPA 10 & CAN/ULC-S508.
.2
Attach bilingual tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for
service dates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins,
handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install or mount extinguishers in cabinets or on brackets in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 10.
.2
Install fire safety blankets as indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits
for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.
.2
Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for and include
product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.2
Drawings to show:
.1
Mounting arrangements.
.2
Operating and maintenance clearances.
.3
Drawings and product data accompanied by:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
.4
In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: use MCAC
"Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for for incorporation into
manual.
.1
Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental
Representative before final inspection.
.2
Operation data to include:
.1
Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.
.2
Description of systems and their controls.
.3
Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset schedules and
seasonal variances.
.4
Operation instruction for systems and component.
.5
Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.3
Maintenance data to include:
.1
Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of
equipment.
.2
Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
Project No. R.067898.002
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.4
1.5
Section 21 05 01
Page 2
Performance data to include:
.1
Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after
commissioning is complete.
.2
Equipment performance verification test results.
.3
Special performance data as specified.
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing for HVAC.
Approvals:
.1
Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative
for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by
Departmental Representative.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental Representative.
Additional data:
.1
Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it
becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials
appropriate to system.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 1
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
1.2
National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA (Fire) 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2007 Edition.
.2
NFPA (Fire) 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2003 Edition.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Materials.
.2
Finishes.
.3
Method of anchorage
.4
Number of anchors.
.5
Supports.
.6
Reinforcement.
.7
Assembly details.
.8
Accessories.
.4
Samples:
.1
Submit samples of following:
.1
Each type of sprinkler head.
.2
Signs.
.5
Test reports:
.1
Submit certified test reports for wet pipe fire protection sprinkler systems from approved
independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.6
Certificates:
.1
Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
.7
Manufacturers' Instructions:
.1
Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.8
Field Quality Control Submittals:
.1
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.3
1.4
1.5
Section 21 13 13
Page 2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide operation, maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 20.
.2
Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including specific model, type, and size for:
.1
Pipe and fittings.
.2
Sprinkler heads.
.3
Pipe hangers and supports.
.4
Mechanical couplings.
.3
Records:
.1
As-built drawings of each system.
.1
After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of
each system for record purposes.
.4
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
.1
Provide Contractors Material and Test Certificate for aboveground and underground piping and
other documentation for incorporation into manual in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 13.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
Installer: company or person specializing in wet sprinkler systems with documented experience.
.2
Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use
date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings for quality assurance and traceability.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
1.6
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Extra Materials:
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Provide spare sprinklers and tools in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 13.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
.1
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.3
Storage and Protection:
.1
Store materials indoors in dry location.
.2
Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
.4
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding,
and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste
Management and Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Design automatic wet pipe fire suppression sprinkler systems in accordance with required and advisory
provisions of NFPA (Fire) 13, by pipe schedules for light hazard occupancy or hydraulic calculations for
uniform distribution of water over design area.
.2
Include with each system materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside building to provide
each system complete and ready for use.
.3
Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment,
ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed shop drawings.
.4
Locate sprinkler heads in consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers.
.5
Devices and equipment for fire protection service: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
.6
Location of Sprinkler Heads:
.1
Locate heads in relation to ceiling and spacing of sprinkler heads not to exceed that permitted by
NFPA (Fire) 13 for light hazard occupancy.
.2
Uniformly space sprinklers on branch.
ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections.
.1
Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings, bushings will not be permitted.
.2
Perform welding in shop; field welding will not be permitted.
.3
Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling.
PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe:
.1
Ferrous: to NFPA (Fire) 13.
.2
Copper tube: to NFPA (Fire) 13.
.2
Fittings and joints to NFPA (Fire) 13:
.1
Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved.
.1
Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure responsive gasket,
and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for
rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact.
.2
Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed, grooved.
.3
Provide welded, threaded, grooved-end type fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser
nipples, or drop nipples are threaded.
.4
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into
pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted.
.5
Rubber gasketted grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings are permitted in pipe
sizes 32 mm and larger.
.6
Fittings: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
Project No. R.067898.002
.7
.8
.9
.3
2.4
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 4
Ensure fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets are supplied by same manufacturer.
Side outlet tees using rubber gasketted fittings are not permitted.
Sprinkler pipe and fittings: metal.
Pipe hangers:
.1
ULC listed for fire protection services in accordance with NFPA.
SPRINKLER HEADS
.1
General: to NFPA (Fire) 13 and ULC listed for fire services.
.2
Sprinkler Head Type:
.1
Type A: upright bronze.
.2
Type B: recessed chrome glass bulb type with ring and cup.
.3
Type C: flush , white cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product
technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.
Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 13 and NFPA (Fire) 25.
PIPE INSTALLATION
.1
Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang
piping from plaster ceilings.
3.4
.2
Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing piping thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter.
.3
Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work
is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter.
.4
Inspect piping before placing into position.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
.1
Notify Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 days prior to connection date.
.2
Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to be made under
pressure.
.3
Bolt sleeves around main piping.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.5
Section 21 13 13
Page 5
.4
Bolt valve to branch connection. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve, and remove
drilling machine, without interruption of service.
.5
Furnish materials required to make connections into existing water supply systems.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.6
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Site Test, Inspection:
.1
Perform test to determine compliance with specified requirements in presence of Departmental
Representative.
.2
Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing.
.3
Preliminary Tests:
.1
Hydrostatically test each system at 200 psig for a 2 hour period with no leakage or reduction
in pressure.
.2
Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 13.
.3
Piping above suspended ceilings: tested, inspected, and approved before installation of
ceilings.
.4
Test alarms and other devices.
.5
Test water flow alarms by flowing water through inspector's test connection. When tests
have been completed and corrections made, submit signed and dated certificate in accordance
with NFPA (Fire) 13.
.4
Formal Tests and Inspections:
.1
Do not submit request for formal test and inspection until preliminary test and corrections are
completed and approved.
.2
Submit written request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to inspection date.
.3
Repeat required tests as directed.
.4
Correct defects and make additional tests until systems comply with contract requirements.
.5
Furnish appliances, equipment, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for tests.
.6
Authority of Jurisdiction, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are
accepted.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS
Section 22 42 16
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02(R2013), Plumbing Fixtures.
.2
CAN/CSA-B125.3-12, Plumbing Fittings.
.3
CAN/CSA-B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing, maintenance.
.3
List of recommended spare parts.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets crates padding
and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste
Management and Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS
Section 22 42 16
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.
.2
Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.
.3
Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.
.4
Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.
.5
Fixtures to be product of one manufacturer.
.6
Trim to be product of one manufacturer.
.7
Stainless steel counter-top sinks.
.1
S-1: barrier-free single compartment, ledge back.
.1
From 1.2 mm thick type 304 stainless steel, self-rimming, undercoated, clamps. Inside sizes:
520 x 510 x 127 mm.
.2
Trim: chrome plated brass, with swing spout, aerator, single lever handle, washerless controls,
accessories to limit maximum flow rate to 8.35 litres/minute at 413 kPa.
.8
Fixture piping:
.1
Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture:
.1
Chrome plated flexible supply pipes each with screwdriver stop, reducers, escutcheon.
.2
Waste:
.1
All barrier free sinks shall have chrome plated offset P-trap with cleanout. Insulate P-trap,
hot and cold water pipes with pre-formed & finished surface insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product
technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights:
.1
Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified.
.2
Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CAN/CSA-B651.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
3.4
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS
ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.
.2
Adjustments:
.1
Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.
.2
Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
Section 22 42 16
Page 3
Project No. R.067898.002
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
TYPE P2 BUILDINGS
Section 23 05 49.01
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Seismic restraint systems for statically supported and vibration isolated equipment and systems;
including all mechanical equipment, both vibration isolated and statically supported.
.2
Related Requirements
.1
Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems.
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
National Research Council Canada (NRCC)
.1
NRCC NBCC-2010, National Building Code of Canada 2010.
DEFINITIONS
.1
Priority Two (P2) Buildings: buildings in which life safety is of paramount concern. It is not necessary
that P2 buildings remain operative during or after earthquake activity.
.2
SRS: acronym for Seismic Restraint System.
DESCRIPTION
.1
SRS fully integrated into, and compatible with:
.1
Noise and vibration controls specified elsewhere.
.2
Structural, mechanical, electrical design of project.
.2
Systems, equipment not required to be operational during and after seismic event.
.3
During seismic event, SRS to prevent systems and equipment from causing personal injury and from
moving from normal position.
.4
Designed by Professional Engineer specializing in design of SRS and registered in Province of Ontario.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in
Province of Ontario, Canada.
.3
Submit design data including:
.1
Full details of design criteria.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.6
Section 23 05 49.01
Page 2
Design calculations (including restraint loads resulting from seismic forces in accordance with
National Building Code, detailed work sheets, tables).
Separate shop drawings for each SRS and devices for each system, equipment.
Identification of location of devices.
Schedules of types of SRS equipment and devices.
Details of fasteners and attachments to structure, anchorage loadings, attachment methods.
Installation procedures and instructions.
Design calculations including restraint loads to NBC and Supplement.
Detailed work sheets, tables Simplified, Detailed work sheets, tables. Simplified, conservative
assumptions may be acceptable.
.4
Submit additional copy of shop drawings and product data to Structural Engineer for review of connection
points to building structure.
.5
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.1
Departmental Representative will make available 1 copy of systems supplier's installation
instructions.
.6
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals
specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.7
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
TYPE P2 BUILDINGS
Health and Safety:
.1
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health
and Safety Requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.
.2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and
recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
TYPE P2 BUILDINGS
Section 23 05 49.01
Page 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SRS MANUFACTURER
.1
2.2
2.3
SRS from one manufacturer regularly engaged in SRS production.
GENERAL
.1
SRS to provide gentle and steady cushioning action and avoid high impact loads.
.2
SRS to restrain seismic forces in every direction.
.3
Fasteners and attachment points to resist same load as seismic restraints.
.4
SRS of Piping systems compatible with:
.1
Expansion, anchoring and guiding requirements.
.2
Equipment vibration isolation and equipment SRS.
.5
SRS utilizing cast iron, threaded pipe, other brittle materials not permitted.
.6
Attachments to RC structure:
.1
Use high strength mechanical expansion anchors.
.2
Drilled or power driven anchors not permitted.
.7
Wet pipe sprinkler systems: refer to Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems.
.8
Seismic control measures not to interfere with integrity of firestopping.
SRS FOR STATIC EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS
.1
Floor-mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Anchor equipment to equipment supports.
.2
Anchor equipment supports to structure.
.3
Use size of bolts scheduled in approved shop drawings.
.2
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Install tight to structure.
.2
Cross-brace in every direction.
.3
Brace back to structure.
.4
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
SCS to prevent sway in horizontal plane, "rocking" in vertical plane, sliding and buckling in axial
direction.
.3
Hanger rods to withstand compressive loading and buckling.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.4
2.5
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
TYPE P2 BUILDINGS
Section 23 05 49.01
Page 4
SRS FOR VIBRATION ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
.1
Floor mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Vibration isolators with built-in snubbers.
.2
Vibration isolators and separate snubbers.
.3
Built-up snubber system approved by Departmental Representative, consisting of structural
elements and elastomeric layer.
.2
SRS to resist complete isolator unloading.
.3
SRS not to jeopardize noise and vibration isolation systems. Provide 4-8 mm clearance between
seismic restraint snubbers and equipment during normal operation of equipment and systems.
.4
Cushioning action: gentle and steady by utilizing elastomeric material or other means in order to
avoid high impact loads.
.2
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
Brace back to structure via vibration isolators and snubbers.
SLACK CABLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SCS)
.1
Use elastomer materials or similar to avoid high impact loads and provide gentle and steady cushioning
action.
.2
SCS to prevent sway in horizontal plane, "rocking" in vertical plane, sliding and buckling in axial direction.
.3
Hanger rods to withstand compressive loading and buckling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product
technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Attachment points and fasteners:
.1
To withstand same maximum load that seismic restraint is to resist and in every direction.
.2
Slack Cable Systems (SCS):
.1
Connect to suspended equipment so that axial projection of wire passes through centre of gravity of
equipment.
.2
Use appropriate grommets, shackles, other hardware to ensure alignment of restraints and to avoid
bending of cables at connection points.
.3
Piping systems: provide transverse SCS at 10 m spacing maximum, longitudinal SCS at 20 m
maximum or as limited by anchor/slack cable performance.
.4
Small pipes may be rigidly secured to larger pipes for restraint purposes, but not reverse.
.5
Orient restraint wires on ceiling hung equipment at approximately 90 degrees to each other (in
plan), tie back to structure at maximum of 45 degrees to structure.
Project No. R.067898.002
.6
.7
3.3
3.4
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
TYPE P2 BUILDINGS
Section 23 05 49.01
Page 5
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack but permit vibration isolation system to
function normally.
Tighten cable to reduce slack to 40 mm under thumb pressure. Cable not to support weight during
normal operation.
.3
Install SRS at least 25 mm from equipment, systems, services.
.4
Miscellaneous equipment not vibration-isolated:
.1
Bolt through house-keeping pad to structure.
.5
Co-ordinate connections with other disciplines.
.6
Vertical tanks:
.1
Anchor through house-keeping pad to structure.
.2
Provide steel bands above centre of gravity.
.7
Horizontal tanks:
.1
Provide at least two straps with anchor bolts fastened to structure.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Arrange with manufacturer's representative to review work of this Section and submit written
reports to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services: consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits to
review installation, scheduled as follows:
.1
After delivery and storage of Products.
.2
After preparatory work is complete but before installation commences.
.3
Twice during the installation, at 25% and 60% completion stages.
.4
Upon completion of installation.
.3
Submit manufacturer's reports to Departmental Representative within 3 days of manufacturer
representative's review.
.2
Inspection and Certification:
.1
SRS: inspected and certified by Seismic Engineer upon completion of installation.
.2
Provide written report to Departmental Representative with certificate of compliance.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess
materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Section 23 05 93
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
TAB is used throughout this Section to describe the process, methods and requirements of testing,
adjusting and balancing for HVAC.
.2
TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.
QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL
.1
Submit names of personnel to perform TAB to Departmental Representative within 15 days of award of
contract.
.2
Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
.3
TAB: performed in accordance with the requirements of standard under which TAB Firm's qualifications
are approved:
.1
Associated Air Balance Council, (AABC) National Standards for Total System Balance,
MN-1-2002.
.2
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) TABES, Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems-1998.
.3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA), HVAC TAB
HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing-2002.
.4
Recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard: mandatory.
.5
Use TAB Standard provisions, including checklists, and report forms to satisfy Contract requirements.
.6
Use TAB Standard for TAB, including qualifications for TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB
instruments.
.7
Where instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in TAB
Standard, use manufacturer's recommendations.
.8
TAB Standard quality assurance provisions such as performance guarantees form part of this contract.
.1
For systems or system components not covered in TAB Standard, use TAB procedures developed
by TAB Specialist.
.2
Where new procedures, and requirements, are applicable to Contract requirements have been
published or adopted by body responsible for TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB),
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements are mandatory.
PURPOSE OF TAB
.1
Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate qualitative and
quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual
or simulated loads
Project No. R.067898.002
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 23 05 93
Page 2
.2
Adjust and regulate equipment and systems to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve
specified interaction with other related systems under normal and emergency loads and operating
conditions.
.3
Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating
ranges.
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and completion
schedule to ensure completion before acceptance of project.
.2
Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in unison
with those systems.
PRE-TAB REVIEW
.1
Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to Departmental
Representative adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design and installation pertinent to
success of TAB.
.2
Review specified standards and report to Departmental Representative in writing proposed procedures
which vary from standard.
.3
During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of TAB devices, equipment, accessories,
measurement ports and fittings.
START-UP
.1
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
.2
Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 23.
OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB
.1
1.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Departmental Representative
for verification of TAB reports.
START OF TAB
.1
Notify Departmental Representative 7 days prior to start of TAB.
.2
Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including:
.3
Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.
.4
Application of weatherstripping, sealing, and caulking.
.5
Pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere Division 23.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.9
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Section 23 05 93
Page 3
.6
Provisions for TAB installed and operational.
.7
Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated electrical and
control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to:
.1
Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.
.2
Air systems:
.1
Filters in place, clean.
.2
Duct systems clean.
.3
Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances.
.4
Correct fan rotation.
.5
Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open.
.6
Coil fins combed, clean.
.7
Access doors, installed, closed.
.8
Outlets installed, volume control dampers open.
APPLICATION TOLERANCES
.1
1.10
Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:
.1
Other HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%.
ACCURACY TOLERANCES
.1
1.11
Measured values accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.
INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Departmental Representative list of instruments used together with serial
numbers.
.2
Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either applicable
system or HVAC system.
.3
Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Departmental Representative.
1.12
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:
.2
Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced standard.
1.13
PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT
.1
Submit for checking and approval of Departmental Representative, prior to submission of formal TAB
report, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:
.1
Details of instruments used.
.2
Details of TAB procedures employed.
.3
Calculations procedures.
.4
Summaries.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.14
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Section 23 05 93
Page 4
TAB REPORT
.1
Format in accordance with referenced standard.
.2
TAB report to show results in SI units and to include:
.1
Project record drawings.
.2
System schematics.
.3
Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Departmental Representative for verification and approval, in English
in D-ring binders, complete with index tabs.
1.15
VERIFICATION
.1
Reported results subject to verification by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide personnel and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results.
.3
Number and location of verified results as directed by Departmental Representative.
.4
Pay costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
1.16
SETTINGS
.1
After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Departmental Representative, replace drive guards, close
access doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings.
.2
Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Do not eradicate or
cover markings.
1.17
COMPLETION OF TAB
.1
1.18
TAB considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by Departmental
Representative.
AIR SYSTEMS
.1
Standard: TAB to most stringent of this section or TAB standards of AABC, NEBB, SMACNA &
ASHRAE.
.2
Do TAB of systems, equipment, components, controls specified Division 23.
.3
Qualifications: personnel performing TAB current member in good standing of AABC or NEBB.
.4
Quality assurance: perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB.
.5
Measurements: to include as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: air velocity, static
pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or loss), temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), duct
cross-sectional area, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration.
Project No. R.067898.002
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
.6
Locations of equipment measurements: to include as appropriate:
.1
Inlet and outlet of dampers, filter, coil, humidifier, fan, other equipment causing changes in
conditions.
.2
At controllers, controlled device.
.7
Locations of systems measurements to include as appropriate: main ducts, main branch, sub-branch,
run-out (or grille, register or diffuser).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Section 23 05 93
Page 5
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions:
.1
For purposes of this section:
.1
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended ceilings and
non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces.
.2
"EXPOSED" - means "not concealed" as previously defined.
.3
Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners, jackets, and other accessories.
.2
TIAC Codes:
.1
CRD: Code Round Ductwork,
.2
CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.
.2
Reference Standards:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.1
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
.2
ASTM International Inc.
.1
ASTM C335/C335M-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of
Pipe Insulation.
.2
ASTM C553-11, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.
.3
ASTM C612-10, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
.3
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment
Thermal Insulation.
.4
Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards (2005).
.5
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
and Assemblies.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for duct insulation, and include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1
Description of equipment giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year and capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.
.3
Recommended spare parts list.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.4
Samples:
.1
Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and
adhesive proposed.
.2
Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board.
.3
Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
1.3
Section 23 07 13
Page 2
Manufacturers' Instructions:
.1
Provide manufacture's written duct insulation jointing recommendations. and special handling criteria,
installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
DUCT INSULATION
Qualifications:
.1
Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, qualified to standards member of TIAC.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address and ULC
markings.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding and
packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
2.2
To CAN/ULC-S102:
.1
Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
.2
Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
INSULATION
.1
Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.
.2
Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 degrees C mean temperature when
tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
.3
TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this Section).
.4
TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section).
.1
Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553.
.2
Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.
.3
Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.3
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13
Page 3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Vapour retarder lap adhesive:
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
.2
Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, plain reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum.
.3
Contact adhesive: quick-setting.
.4
Tie wire: 1.5 mm stainless steel.
.5
Fasteners: 4 mm diameter pins with 35 mm diameter clips, length to suit thickness of insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
3.3
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product
technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
PRE- INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pressure test ductwork systems complete, witness and certify.
.2
Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, free from foreign material.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.
.2
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated.
.3
Use 2 layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm.
.4
Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.
.1
Ensure hangers, and supports are outside vapour retarder jacket.
.5
Hangers and supports:
.1
Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of
ductwork.
.6
Fasteners: install at 300 mm on centre in horizontal and vertical directions, minimum 2 rows each side.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.4
DUCT INSULATION
DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
.1
Insulation types and thicknesses: conform to following table:
TIAC Code
Rectangular
cold and
dual
temperature
supply air
ducts
Round cold
and dual
temperature
supply air
ducts
Acoustically
lined
ducts
3.5
Section 23 07 13
Page 4
C-1
Vapour
Retarder
yes
Thickness
(mm)
50
C-2
yes
50
none
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
Section 23 31 13.01
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.2
ASTM International
.1
ASTM A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.
.2
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012.
.3
IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction 2007.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for metal ducts and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.4
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
Certification of Ratings:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and
with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect metal ducts from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Project No. R.067898.002
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
Section 23 31 13.01
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
Classification as follows:
Maximum Pressure Pa
500
250
125
125
.2
2.2
2.3
.1
Sustainability Characteristics:
.1
Adhesives and sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
.2
Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30
degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.
TAPE
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm wide.
DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
2.5
Seal classification:
.1
Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with
sealant and tape.
.2
Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant, tape or
combination thereof.
.3
Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with gasket, sealant, tape or combination
thereof. Longitudinal seams unsealed.
.4
Unsealed seams and joints.
SEALANT
.1
2.4
SMACNA Seal Class
C
C
C
Unsealed
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
FITTINGS
.1
Fabrication: to SMACNA.
.2
Radiused elbows:
.1
Rectangular: standard radius short radius with single thickness turning vanes centreline radius: 1.5 times
width of duct.
.2
Round: smooth radius five piece, centreline radius: 1.5 times diameter.
.3
Branches:
.1
Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct 45 degrees entry on branch.
.2
Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
2.6
2.7
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
Section 23 31 13.01
Page 3
Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.
Main duct branches: with splitter damper.
.4
Transitions:
.1
Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle.
.2
Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle.
.5
Offsets:
.1
Full radiused elbows as indicated.
.6
Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area.
.1
Maximum included angles: as for transitions.
FIRE STOPPING
.1
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Fire
Stopping.
.2
Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
GALVANIZED STEEL
.1
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating.
.2
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to ASHRAE & SMACNA.
.3
Joints: to ASHRAE, SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged
duct joint to be considered to be a class A seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for metal duct installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of
written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with ASHRAE & SMACNA as indicated.
.2
Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods.
.1
Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct. Ensure diffuser is fully seated.
.3
Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE & SMACNA.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
.4
Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.
.5
Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.6
Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodate installation of acoustic duct lining.
HANGERS
.1
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3
Hanger spacing: in accordance with ASHRAE & SMACNA as follows:
Duct Size
(mm)
to 1500
1501 and over
3.4
3.5
Section 23 31 13.01
Page 4
Spacing
(mm)
3000
2500
SEALING AND TAPING
.1
Apply sealant in accordance with SMACNA and to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturers recommendations.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with
Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Section 23 33 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
1.2
1.3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for air duct
accessories and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Flexible connections.
.2
Duct access doors.
.3
Turning vanes.
.4
Instrument test ports.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect air duct accessories from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding,
and packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction
Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.
Project No. R.067898.002
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Section 23 33 00
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
2.3
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1
Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame 10 mm thick with fabric clenched by means of double locked
seams.
.2
Material:
.1
Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus 40
degrees C to plus 90 degrees C, density of 1.3 kg/m 2.
SPIN-IN COLLARS
.1
Conical galvanized sheet metal spin-in collars with lockable butterfly damper.
.2
Sheet metal thickness to co-responding round duct standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for air duct accessories installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Flexible Connections:
.1
Install in following locations:
.1
Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans.
.2
Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.
.3
As indicated.
.2
Length of connection: 100 mm.
.3
Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 75 mm.
.4
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.5
When fan is running:
.1
Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be in alignment.
.2
Ensure slack material in flexible connection.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Section 23 33 00
Page 3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-2013.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for dampers and include
product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for dampers for incorporation into
manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and
with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect dampers from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Project No. R.067898.002
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Manufacture to SMACNA standards.
SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1
Fabricate from same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened.
.2
Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 100 mm as indicated.
.3
Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness.
.4
Inside and outside nylon bronze end bearings.
.5
Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for damper installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of
written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install where indicated.
.2
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Locate balancing dampers in each branch duct, for supply, return and exhaust systems.
.4
Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as possible to main ducts.
.5
Dampers: vibration free.
.6
Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.
.7
Corrections and adjustments conducted by Departmental Representative.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14
Page 3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with
Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)
.2
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA (Fire) 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2012
Edition.
.2
NFPA (Fire) 90B, Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems, 2012
Edition.
.3
Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.
.2
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction,2005.
.4
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
.1
UL 181, Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
.5
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S110-13, Standard Methods of Tests for Air Ducts.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for flexible ducts and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Thermal properties.
.2
Friction loss.
.3
Acoustical loss.
.4
Leakage.
.5
Fire rating.
.3
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and
with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46
Page 2
Store and protect flexible ducts from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
.1
Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC-S110.
.2
Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.
.3
Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.
METALLIC - INSULATED
.1
Type 1: spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied, 37 mm thick flexible glass fibre thermal
insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl jacket, as indicated.
.2
Performance:
.1
Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage.
.2
Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
DUCT INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for flexible ducts installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of
written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
Install in accordance with: CAN/ULC-S110, UL 181, NFPA (Fire) 90A, NFPA (Fire) 90B & SMACNA.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions .
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with
Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
DUCT LINERS
Section 23 33 53
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
ASTM C177-13, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
.2
ASTM C423-09a, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method.
.3
ASTM C916-85(2007), Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.
.4
ASTM C1071-12, Standard specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material).
.5
ASTM C1338-08, Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials
and Facings.
.6
ASTM G21-09, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi.
.2
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA (Fire) 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2012
Edition.
.2
NFPA (Fire) 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,
2013 Edition.
.3
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA)
.1
NAIMA AH116-2002, Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
.4
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-2005.
.2
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction-2007.
.5
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials and Assemblies.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for duct liners and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for duct liners for incorporation
into manual.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.4
DUCT LINERS
Section 23 33 53
Page 2
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect duct liners from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
DUCT LINER
.1
General:
.1
Mineral Fibre duct liner: air surface coated mat facing.
.2
Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50 when
tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102 and NFPA 90A NFPA 90B.
.3
Recycled Content: EcoLogo certified with minimum 35% by weight recycled content.
.4
Fungi resistance: to ASTM C1338 & ASTM G21.
.2
Rigid:
.1
Use on flat surfaces where indicated.
.2
25 mm thick, to ASTM C1071 Type 2, fibrous glass rigid board duct liner.
.3
Density: 48 kg/m3 minimum.
.4
Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.76 (m2. degrees C)/W for 25 mm thickness when tested in
accordance with ASTM C177, at 24 degrees C mean temperature.
.5
Maximum velocity on faced air side: 20.3 m/s.
.6
Minimum NRC of 0.70 at 25 mm thickness based on Type A mounting to ASTM C423.
.7
Recycled Content: EcoLogo certified containing minimum 45% by weight recycled content.
.3
Flexible:
.1
Use on round or oval surfaces surfaces indicated.
.2
25 mm thick, to ASTM C1071 Type 1, fibrous glass blanket duct liner.
.3
Density: 24 kg/m3 minimum.
.4
Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.37 (m2.degrees C)/W for 12 mm thickness when tested in
accordance with ASTM C177, at 24 degrees C mean temperature.
.5
Maximum velocity on coated air side: 25.4 m/s.
.6
Minimum NRC of 0.65 at 25 mm thickness based on Type A mounting to ASTM C423.
ADHESIVE
.1
Adhesive: to NFPA (Fire) 90A, NFPA (Fire) 90B and ASTM C916.
.2
Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature
range minus 29 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
2.3
Water-based fire retardant type.
Weld pins 2.0 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 32 mm square.
JOINT TAPE
.1
2.5
Section 23 33 53
Page 3
FASTENERS
.1
2.4
DUCT LINERS
Poly-Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 50 mm wide.
SEALER
.1
Meet requirements of NFPA (Fire) 90A and NFPA (Fire) 90B.
.2
Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature
range minus 68 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
3.3
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for duct liner installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard, NAIMA AH116 and as
indicated except as specified otherwise.
.2
Line inside of ducts where indicated.
.3
Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining.
DUCT LINER
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows:
.1
Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive to ASTM C916.
.1
Exposed leading edges and transverse joints to be factory coated or coated with adhesive
during fabrication.
.2
In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not more than 425 mm
on centres, to compress duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
3.4
3.5
DUCT LINERS
Section 23 33 53
Page 4
In systems, where air velocities exceeds 20.3 m/s, install galvanized sheet metal noising to leading edges
of duct liner.
JOINTS
.1
Seal butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and damaged areas of liner with joint tape
and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, and as follows:
.1
Bed tape in sealer.
.2
Apply 2 coats of sealer over tape.
.2
Replace damaged areas of liner at discretion of Departmental Representative.
.3
Protect leading and trailing edges of duct sections with sheet metal nosing having 15 mm overlap and
fastened to duct.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
REFERENCES
.1
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
.1
AMCA 99-10, Standards Handbook.
.2
AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
.3
AMCA 300-08, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
.4
AMCA 301-06, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
.2
The Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1
Architectural Painting Specification Manual - current edition.
.1
MPI #18, Primer, Zinc Rich, Organic.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for HVAC fans and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.2
Provide:
.1
Fan performance curves showing point of operation, bhp and efficiency.
.2
Sound rating data at point of operation.
.3
Indicate:
.1
Motors, sheaves, bearings, shaft details.
.2
Minimum performance achievable with variable speed controllers and variable inlet vanes as
appropriate.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.1
Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment, include:
.1
Bearings and seals.
.2
Addresses of suppliers.
.3
List of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00
Page 2
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect HVAC fans from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
2.2
2.3
Performance Requirements:
.1
Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying
adherence to codes and standards in force.
.2
Capacity: flow rate, total static pressure, bhp, efficiency, revolutions per minute, power, model, size,
sound power data and as indicated on schedule.
.3
Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99.
.4
Sound ratings: comply with AMCA Standard 301, tested to AMCA 300. Supply unit with AMCA
certified sound rating seal.
.5
Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA 210. Supply unit with
AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 300 mm diameter.
FANS GENERAL
.1
Motors:
.1
Sizes as indicated.
.2
Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.
.3
Scroll casing drains: as indicated.
.4
Flexible connections: to Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
.1
Fan wheels:
.1
Welded steel or aluminum construction.
.2
Maximum operating speed of centrifugal fans not more than 40% of first critical speed.
.3
Backward inclined blades, as indicated.
.2
Bearings: heavy duty grease lubricated ball or roller self aligning type with oil retaining, dust excluding
seals and a certified minimum rated life of 100,000 hours.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.4
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00
Page 3
CABINET FANS - GENERAL PURPOSE
.1
Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans.
.2
Cabinet hung single or multiple wheel with DWDI centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing complete
with vibration isolators and seismic control measures, motor, variable speed controller.
.3
Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel reinforced and braced for rigidity. Provide
removable panels for access to interior. Paint uncoated, steel parts with corrosion resistant paint to MPI
#18. Finish inside and out, over prime coat, with rust resistant enamel. Internally line cabinet with 25 mm
thick rigid acoustic insulation, pinned and cemented.
.4
Solid state speed controller, CSA listed, shipped loose for mounting on wall by electrical trade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
3.3
FAN INSTALLATION
.1
Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings, flexible electrical leads and flexible
connections in accordance with Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
.2
Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible.
ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
3.4
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for HVAC fans installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
Size anchor bolts to withstand seismic acceleration and velocity forces as specified.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA (Fire) 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2012
Edition.
.2
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
.1
UL 181, Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for air terminal units
and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of
Ontario, Canada.
.2
Indicate the following:
.1
Capacity.
.2
Pressure drop.
.3
Noise rating.
.4
Leakage.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for air terminal units for
incorporation into manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect air terminal units from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Project No. R.067898.002
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
2.3
2.4
Performance Requirements:
.1
Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from certified ADC (Air Diffusion Council) testing
agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
Terminal units of the same type to be product of one manufacturer.
VARIABLE VOLUME BOXES
.1
Pressure independent factory reset to air flow between zero minimum and maximum air volume.
.2
Sizes, capacities, differential pressures and sound ratings: as indicated on drawings. Adjust VAV box
maximum to suit diffuser airflow, minimum to 20% of maximum.
.3
Differential pressure not to exceed 25 Pa at inlet air velocity of 10 m/s.
.4
Complete with:
.1
Operator and controller: DDC, field mounted by base building Controls Contractor, to match
existing building standard.
.2
Sound attenuator.
.3
DDC controller to operate damper operator between maximum or minimum air volume settings:.
.5
Minimum 35 kPa reset span.
.6
Adjustable reset start point.
.7
Operator to be field mounted and calibrated:
.1
Gauge taps for balancing with standard pressure gauge.
.2
Controller to have adjustable flow settings.
.8
Casing: constructed of galvanized steel, internally lined with 25 mm, 0.7 kg density fibrous glass, to
UL 181 and NFPA (Fire) 90A. Mount control components inside protective metal shroud.
.9
Damper: galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self lubricating bearings. Air leakage past closed
damper not to exceed 2% of nominal rating at 750 Pa inlet static pressure, in accordance with Air
Diffusion Council test procedure.
FAN POWERED BOXES
.1
General:
.1
Primary air assembly, pressure independent with reset to any air flow between zero and maximum
air volume as indicated.
.2
DDC controller to operate damper operator between independent of maximum or minimum air
volume settings.
Project No. R.067898.002
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00
Page 3
DDC operator and controller to be field mounted by base building contractor, to match existing base
building standard.
Field calibration and readjustment of air volume as follows:
.1
Gauge tops for balancing with standard pressure gauge.
.2
Adjustable flow settings.
Casing: galvanized steel, internally lined with 25 mm, 0.7 kg density fibrous glass, to UL 181 and
NFPA (Fire) 90A. Mount control components inside protective metal shroud.
Damper: galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self lubricating bearings. Air leakage past
closed damper not to exceed 2% of nominal rating at 750 Pa inlet static pressure, in accordance
with Air Diffusion Council test procedure.
Complete with:
.1
Sound attenuator.
Fan section:
.1
CSA certified.
.2
Forward curved, centrifugal, direct drive, permanently lubricated ECM motor, internally suspended
and isolated from casing on rubber-in-shear isolators complete with access panel.
.3
Fan controls sealed from primary air flow.
.4
Electrical characteristics: as per schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
3.3
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for air terminal units installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
.2
Support independently of ductwork.
.3
Install with at least 1000 mm of flexible inlet ducting and minimum of four duct diameters of straight inlet
duct, same size as inlet.
.4
Locate controls, dampers and access panels for easy access.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
Project No. R.067898.002
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for diffusers, registers
and grilles and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.2
Indicate following:
.1
Capacity.
.2
Throw and terminal velocity.
.3
Noise criteria.
.4
Pressure drop.
.5
Neck velocity.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Extra Materials:
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Keys for volume control adjustment.
.2
Keys for air flow pattern adjustment.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled
with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect diffuser, registers and grilles from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Project No. R.067898.002
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
2.2
2.3
GENERAL
.1
Frames:
.1
Full perimeter gaskets.
.2
Plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board and as specified.
.3
Concealed fasteners.
.2
Concealed manual volume control damper operators.
.3
Colour: standard.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
2.4
Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type, products of one manufacturer.
RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
2.5
Performance Requirements:
.1
Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying
adherence to codes and standards.
Type RG1/TG1: aluminum, 13 x 13 mm egg crate type face bars, size as indicated on drawings, with
drywall frame in coffered ceiling tiles. Finish: White.
DIFFUSERS
.1
General: volume control dampers with flow straightening devices and gaskets.
.2
Type SD-1: existing coffered ceiling diffuser to remain or be relocated.
.3
Type SD-2: steel, square type, 300 x 300, having fixed pattern, neck size as indicated on drawings, lay-in
mounted. Finish: White.
Project No. R.067898.002
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13
Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
3.3
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or
Contracts are acceptable for diffuser, register and grille installation in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt
of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
.2
Install with cadmium plated screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.
.3
Bolt grilles, registers and diffusers, in place, in gymnasium and similar game rooms.
.4
Provide concealed safety chain on each grille, register and diffuser in gymnasium and similar game rooms
and elsewhere as indicated.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section 01 00 10 - General Instructions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
General requirements for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) that are common to
NMS EMCS Sections.
.2
Related Requirements
.1
Section 21 05 01 - Common Work Results for Mechanical.
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA).
.1
ANSI/ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
.1
ANSI/IEEE 260.1-1993, American National Standard Letter Symbols Units of Measurement (SI Units,
Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain Other Units).
.3
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).
.1
ASHRAE STD 135-R2001, BACNET - Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and
Control Network.
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CAN/CSA-Z234.1-89(R1995), Canadian Metric Practice Guide.
.5
Consumer Electronics Association (CEA).
.1
CEA-709.1-B-2002, Control Network Protocol Specification.
.6
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995, c. 37.
.2
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.
.7
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.8
Transport Canada (TC).
.1
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
.1
Acronyms used in EMCS:
.1
AEL - Average Effectiveness Level.
.2
AI - Analog Input.
.3
AIT - Agreement on International Trade.
.4
AO - Analog Output.
.5
BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network.
.6
BC(s) - Building Controller(s).
.7
BECC - Building Environmental Control Center.
.8
CAD - Computer Aided Design.
Project No. R.067898.002
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
.38
.39
.40
.41
1.4
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 2
CDL - Control Description Logic.
CDS - Control Design Schematic.
COSV - Change of State or Value.
CPU - Central Processing Unit.
DI - Digital Input.
DO - Digital Output.
DP - Differential Pressure.
ECU - Equipment Control Unit.
EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System.
HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning.
IDE - Interface Device Equipment.
I/O - Input/Output.
ISA - Industry Standard Architecture.
LAN - Local Area Network.
LCU - Local Control Unit.
MCU - Master Control Unit.
NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement.
NC - Normally Closed.
NO - Normally Open.
OS - Operating System.
O&M - Operation and Maintenance.
OWS - Operator Work Station.
PC - Personal Computer.
PCI - Peripheral Control Interface.
PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter.
PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative.
RAM - Random Access Memory.
SP - Static Pressure.
ROM - Read Only Memory.
TCU - Terminal Control Unit.
USB - Universal Serial Bus.
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply.
VAV - Variable Air Volume.
DEFINITIONS
.1
Point: may be logical or physical.
.1
Logical points: values calculated by system such as setpoints, totals, counts, derived corrections and
may include, but not limited to result of and statements in CDL's.
.2
Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which are measuring
physical properties, or providing status conditions of contacts or relays which provide interaction with
related equipment (stop, start) and valve or damper actuators.
.2
Point Name: composed of two parts, point identifier and point expansion.
.1
Point identifier: comprised of three descriptors, "area" descriptor, "system" descriptor and "point"
descriptor, for which database to provide 25 character field for each point identifier. "System" is system
that point is located on.
.1
Area descriptor: building or part of building where point is located.
.2
System descriptor: system that point is located on.
.3
Point descriptor: physical or logical point description. For point identifier "area", "system" and
"point" will be shortforms or acronyms. Database must provide 25character field for each point
identifier.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
1.5
1.6
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 3
Point expansion : comprised of three fields, one for each descriptor. Expanded form of shortform or
acronym used in "area", "system" and "point" descriptors is placed into appropriate point expansion
field. Database must provide 32 character field for each point expansion.
Bilingual systems to include additional point identifier expansion fields of equal capacity for each point
name for second language.
.1
System to support use of numbers and readable characters including blanks, periods or
underscores to enhance user readability for each of the above strings.
.3
Point Object Type: points fall into following object types:
.1
AI (analog input).
.2
AO (analog output).
.3
DI (digital input).
.4
DO (digital output).
.5
Pulse inputs.
.4
Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5.
.1
Printouts: to ANSI/IEEE 260.1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including, but not limited to,
following:
.1
DDC VAV box actuator and temperature sensors to match existing.
.2
Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCS data transmission system.
.3
Field control devices.
.4
Software/Hardware complete with full documentation.
.5
Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation.
.6
Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by others.
.7
Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.
.2
Design Requirements:
.1
Design and provide conduit and wiring linking elements of system.
.2
Supply sufficient programmable controllers of types to meet project requirements. Quantity and points
contents as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to installation.
.3
Location of controllers as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to installation.
.3
Existing systems: Existing base building controls service contractor for R.H. Coats building is Regulvar, and for
Jean Talon building is Direct Energy.
.4
All workmanship and materials to match existing base building standard.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Quality Control:
.1
Provide equipment and material from manufacturer's regular production, CSA certified, manufactured to
standard quoted plus additional specified requirements.
.2
Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to inspection authorities for
special inspection and approval before delivery to site.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.7
1.8
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2 weeks after award
of Contract.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard packaging material in
appropriate on-site bins for recycling.
.4
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel Metal Plastic waste in
accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.5
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
EXISTING- CONTROL COMPONENTS
.1
Utilize existing control wiring and piping as indicated.
.2
Re-use field control devices that are usable in their original configuration provided that they conform to
applicable codes, standards specifications.
.1
Do not modify original design of existing devices without written permission fromDepartmental
Representative.
.2
Provide for new, properly designed device where re-usability of components is uncertain.
.3
Inspect and test existing devices intended for re-use within 30 days of award of contract, and prior to
installation of new devices.
.1
Furnish test report within 40 days of award of contract listing each component to be re-used and
indicating whether it is in good order or requires repair by Departmental Representative.
.2
Failure to produce test report will constitute acceptance of existing devices by contractor.
.4
Non-functioning items:
.1
Provide with report specification sheets or written functional requirements to support findings.
.2
Departmental Representative will repair or replace existing items judged defective yet deemed necessary
for EMCS.
.5
Submit written request for permission to disconnect controls and to obtain equipment downtime before
proceeding with Work.
.6
Assume responsibility for controls to be incorporated into EMCS after written receipt of approval from
Departmental Representative.
.1
Be responsible for items repaired or replaced by Departmental Representative.
.2
Be responsible for repair costs due to negligence or abuse of equipment.
.3
Responsibility for existing devices terminates upon final acceptance of EMCS by Departmental
Representative.
.7
Remove existing controls not re-used or not required. Place in approved storage for disposition as directed.
Project No. R.067898.002
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Control Network Protocol and Data Communication Protocol: to CEA 709.1 ASHRAE STD 135.
.2
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on project and forming part of bid tender documents by
adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval.
.1
All materials to match existing base building standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
.1
Installation: to manufacturer's recommendations.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.2
Section 26 28 23 - Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.1-12, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (22nd Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical
Installations.
.2
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC)
.1
EEMAC 2Y-1, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.
.3
Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code Product Line (NESC)
.1
IEEE SP1122, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th Edition.
.4
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC S537-04, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.4
Electrical and electronic terms: unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in these specifications, and
on drawings, are those defined by IEEE SP1122.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235.
.2
Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz
within normal operating limits established by above standard.
.1
Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to
equipment.
.3
Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates and labels for control items in English and
French.
.4
Use one nameplate or label for each language.
.5
Coordinate work with mechanical contractor to avoid interference.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.5
1.6
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings with contractor's stamp to indicate acceptance and conformance to installation
requirements.
.2
Submit wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and
arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to
ensure co-ordinated installation.
.3
Identify on wiring diagrams circuit terminals and indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and
interconnection between each item of equipment.
.4
Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices.
.5
Submit shop drawings and product data electronically to Departmental Representative for review of
conformance to design intent.
.6
If changes are required, notify Departmental Represenative of these changes before they are made.
.3
Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control:
.1
Provide CSA certified equipment and material.
.2
Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to
inspection authorities for special approval before delivery to site.
.3
Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.
.4
Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract.
.5
Submit shop drawings and product data electronically to Departmental Representative for review of
conformance to design intent.
.6
Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to
Departmental Represenative.
.4
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Departmental Represenative's written report, within 3 days of
review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical system and instrumentation testing, as described in PART
3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.2
Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians who hold valid Master
Electrical Contractor license or apprentices as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting manpower
vocational training and qualification.
.1
Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under direct supervision of qualified
licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks
.2
Permitted activities: determined based on training level attained and demonstration of ability to perform
specific duties.
.3
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.7
1.8
Section 26 05 00
Page 3
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Represenative with schedule within 2 weeks after award of
Contract.
.2
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in
accordance with Waste Management Plan.
SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
1.9
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Instruct Departmental Represenative and operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems,
system equipment and components.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical sections for use by
operation and maintenance personnel.
.2
Operating instructions to include following:
.1
Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of
equipment.
.2
Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.
.3
Safety precautions.
.4
Procedures to be followed in event of equipment failure.
.5
Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.
1.10
MODIFICATIONS TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
.1
Where work requires modifications to or interruption of fire alarms systems:
.1
Retain services of building fire alarm maintenance contractor (Jean Talon Building - Simplex, and R.H.
Coats Building - Siemens) for fire alarm systems on a daily basis, to isolate and protect all devices
relating to:
.1
modification of fire alarms systems; and/or
.2
cutting, welding, soldering or other construction activities which might activate fire alarm system.
.2
Immediately upon completion of work, restore fire alarm systems to normal operation and verify that all
devices are fully operational.
.3
Inform fire alarm system monitoring agency and local Fire Department immediately prior to isolation and
immediately upon restoration of normal operation.
.4
Provide verification report at completion of work in accordance with CAN/ULC S537.
Project No. R.067898.002
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and equipment are not available,
obtain special approval from inspection authorities before delivery to site and submit such approval as
described in PART 1.5 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction and Departmental
Represenative.
.2
Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.
WIRING TERMINATIONS
.1
2.4
Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum
conductors.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:
.1
Nameplates: lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core (or to match building
starndard), lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core mechanically attached with self tapping
screws.
.2
Sizes as follows:
NAMEPLATE SIZES
Size 6
25 x 100 mm
1 line
12 mm high letters
25 x 100 mm
2 lines
6 mm high letters
Size 7
.2
Labels: electronically printed, self-adhesive, plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise.
White with black lettering.
.3
Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Departmental Represenative prior to manufacture.
.4
Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate .
.5
Nameplates for junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.
.6
Identify equipment with labels engraved "ASSET INVENTORY NO." as directed by Departmental
Represenative.
.7
Disconnects, splitters & panels: indicate equipment power source and voltage.
.8
Pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.5
2.6
Section 26 05 00
Page 5
WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, numbered on both ends of phase conductors of
feeders and branch circuit wiring.
.2
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3
Colour coding: to CSA C22.1.
.4
Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFIC
.1
Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.
.2
Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m
intervals.
.3
Colours: 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour.
up to 250 V
up to 600 V
2.7
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Prime
Yellow
Yellow
Auxiliary
Green
FINISHES
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least
two coats of finish enamel.
.1
Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish to EEMAC Y1-1.
.2
Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
3.2
Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified otherwise.
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
.2
Provide labels indicating panel name and circuit number for all receptacles and light switches.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
3.4
3.5
Section 26 05 00
Page 6
CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Sleeves through concrete: sized for free passage of conduit and protruding 50 mm.
.2
If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation.
.3
Install cables, conduits and fittings embedded or plastered over, close to building structure so furring can be
kept to minimum.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated
otherwise.
.2
If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.
.3
Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.
.1
Local switches: 1200 mm.
.2
Wall receptacles:
.1
General: 400 mm.
.2
Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm.
.3
Above top of counters or counter back splashes: 175 mm.
.4
In mechanical rooms: 1200 mm.
.3
Telephone and interphone outlets: 400 mm.
.4
Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1200 mm.
.5
Fire alarm pull stations: 1200 mm.
.6
Television outlets: 400 mm.
CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
.1
3.6
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and
settings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Load Balance:
.1
Measure phase current to panelboards affected by the work with normal loads (lighting) operating at
time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current
between phases for new and existing loads and record changes.
.2
Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: phase and neutral currents on panelboards affected by the work,
operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at
time of test.
.2
Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
Power generation and distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.
.2
Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
.3
Motors and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable.
.3
Carry out tests in presence of Departmental Represenative.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.7
3.8
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 7
.4
Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of
project.
.5
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying,
protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 SUBMITTALS.
.2
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits
for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANING
.1
Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation,
to match original paint.
.2
Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.
DEMOLITION
.1
Unless otherwise noted, materials for removal become the contractor's property and shall be taken from site,
and disposed of in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and regulations.
.2
Disconnect and make safe all systems to be demolished including panels, feeders, branch circuits and
equipment by other divisions. Coordinate with other divisions.
.3
Maintain existing remaining circuits, systems, etc., which pass through area of construction. Provide necessary
components to maintain systems. Ensure components will be concealed when construction is complete.
.4
Reinstate immediately any remaining existing systems that are in-advertently interrupted during construction.
.5
Remove redundant conduit and wiring back to source unless otherwise noted, and make safe.
.6
Devices from demolition are not to be reused unless noted otherwise.
.7
All fire alarm devices to remain in operation. Protect smoke detectors from dust exposure during construction.
.8
Ensure fire alarm system is operational at the end of each shift.
.9
After demolition work is complete and prior to proceeding with new work, notify the Departmental
Representative for inspection.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
Section 26 05 20
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.3
Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.
Section 26 05 21 - Wire and Cables (0-1000 V).
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated
Hardware.
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 65-13, Wire Connectors.
.2
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC)
.1
EEMAC 1Y-2, Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum
Rating).
.3
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Pressure type wire connectors to: CSA C22.2 No. 65, with current carrying parts of copper alloy sized to
fit copper conductors as required.
.2
Clamps or connectors for armoured cable and flexible conduit as required to: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:
.1
Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool
recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA
C22.2 No. 65.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000 V)
Section 26 05 21
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000 V.
.2
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
BUILDING WIRES
.1
Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG (6 mm2) and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG (4 mm2).
.2
Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 1000 V insulation of chemically cross-linked thermosetting
polyethylene material rated RW90.
ARMOURED CABLES
.1
Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated.
.2
Type: AC90.
.3
Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.
.4
Connectors: anti short connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1
Install wiring as follows:
.1
In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit
Fittings.
.2
Install minimum #12 AWG green insulated ground wire in all conduits used for power or lighting
circuit.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29
Page 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT CHANNELS
.1
U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted and suspended.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors.
.2
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as
accessories to basic channel members.
.3
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.
.1
One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.
.2
Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.
.3
Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.
.4
Suspended support systems.
.1
Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm diameter threaded rods and spring clips.
.2
Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm diameter threaded rod
hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.
.5
For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3 m on centre spacing.
.6
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated
or as required to support conduit and cable runs.
.7
Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall
support.
.8
Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.9
Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with
permission of other trade and approval of Departmental Representative.
.10
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in
accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.11
Paint cut ends of threaded rods with zinc rust inhibiting paint.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Section 01 00 10 - General
Instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SPLITTERS
.1
Construction: Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in
closed position.
.2
Terminations: Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing
conductors as indicated.
.3
Spare Terminals: minimum three spare terminals on each connection or lug block sized less than 400 A.
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1
Construction: welded steel enclosure.
.2
Covers flush mounted: 25 mm minimum extension all around.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SPLITTER INSTALLATION
.1
Mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.
.2
Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.
JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run
or three 90° bends between pull boxes.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.3
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
IDENTIFICATION
.1
Equipment identification: to Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
.2
Identification labels: Size 2 indicating voltage and phase.
END
Section 26 05 31
Page 2
Project No. R.067898.002
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Section 26 05 32
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.1-12, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 22nd Edition.
Submit samples for floor box in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste
Management and Disposal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.
.2
102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required.
.3
Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4
Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.5
347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices.
.6
Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.
GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1
One-piece electro-galvanized construction.
.2
Single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as
indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension
and plaster rings as required.
.3
102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.
.4
Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished walls.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.3
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Section 26 05 32
Page 2
FITTINGS - GENERAL
.1
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2
Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.
.3
Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.
.4
Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.2
Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during
construction. Remove upon completion of work.
.3
For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to
come within 6 mm of opening.
.4
Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable
connections. Do not install reducing washers.
.5
Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices.
.6
Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT
FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables (0-1000 V).
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated
Hardware, A National Standard of Canada.
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 56-04(R2009), Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
.3
CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
CONDUITS
.1
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings with expanded ends.
.2
Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, steel liquid-tight flexible metal.
CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1
One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and smaller.
.1
Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm.
.2
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
.3
Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m on centre.
.4
Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1
Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as
conduit.
.2
Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for 25 mm and larger conduits.
.3
Steel connectors and couplings for EMT.
Project No. R.067898.002
2.4
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT
FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 2
FISH CORD
.1
Polypropylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product
technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces
through which they pass.
.2
Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms.
.3
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except whre otherwise indicated.
.4
Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas.
.5
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or
corrosive locations.
.6
Minimum conduit size for power circuits: 21 mm.
.7
Bend conduit cold:
.1
Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.8
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter.
.9
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.10
Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.11
Remove and replace blocked conduit sections.
.1
Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.
.12
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
SURFACE CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance.
.3
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4
Group conduits wherever possible on surface channels.
Project No. R.067898.002
3.4
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT
FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 3
.5
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.
.6
Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at
crossovers.
CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS) - TYPE P2
Section 26 05 40
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
DEFINITIONS
.1
Priority Two (P2) Buildings: buildings in which life safety is paramount concern. It is not necessary that
P2 buildings remain operative during or after an earthquake.
.2
SRS: acronym for Seismic Restraint System.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.1
This section covers design, supply and installation of complete SRS for all systems, equipment specified
for installation on this project. This includes electrical light fixtures, conduit, electrical equipment and
systems, both vibration isolated and statically supported.
.2
SRS to be fully integrated into, compatible with:
.1
Noise and vibration controls specified elsewhere in this project specification.
.2
Structural, mechanical, electrical design of project.
.3
During seismic event, SRS to prevent systems and equipment from causing personal injury and from
moving from normal position.
.4
Design to be by Professional Engineer specializing in design of SRS and registered in Province of
Ontario. Division 26 to include all costs associated with this work as it relates to Division 26 installations.
Submit design sketches c/w professional stamp prior to start of installations, c/w installation requirements.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for
Electrical.
.2
Submittals to include:
.1
Full details of design criteria.
.3
Submit additional copy of shop drawings and product data to Structural Engineer for review of connection
points to building structure.
MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
Project No. R.067898.002
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS) - TYPE P2
Section 26 05 40
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SRS MANUFACTURER
.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SRS to be from one manufacturer regularly engaged in production of same.
GENERAL
.1
SRS to provide gentle and steady cushioning action and avoid high impact loads
.2
SRS to restrain seismic forces in all directions.
.3
Fasteners and attachment points to resist same load as seismic restraints.
.4
SRS of conduit systems to be compatible with:
.1
Expansion, anchoring and guiding requirements.
.2
Equipment vibration isolation and equipment SRS.
.5
SRS utilizing cast iron, threaded pipe, other brittle materials not permitted.
.6
Attachments to RC structure:
.1
Use high strength mechanical expansion anchors.
.2
Drilled or power driven anchors not permitted.
.7
Seismic control measures not to interfere with integrity of firestopping.
SRS FOR STATIC EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS
.1
Floor-mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Anchor equipment to equipment supports.
.2
Anchor equipment supports to structure.
.3
Use size of bolts scheduled in approved shop drawings.
.2
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Install tight to structure.
.2
Cross-brace in all directions.
.3
Brace back to structure.
.4
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
SRS to prevent sway in horizontal plane, "rocking" in vertical plane, sliding and buckling in axial
direction.
.3
Hanger rods to withstand compressive loading and buckling.
SRS FOR VIBRATION ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
.1
Floor mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Vibration isolators with built-in snubbers.
.2
Vibration isolators and separate snubbers.
Project No. R.067898.002
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS) - TYPE P2
Section 26 05 40
Page 3
.3
.2
.3
.4
.2
Built-up snubber system approved by Engineer, consisting of structural elements and
elastomeric layer.
SRS to resist complete isolator unloading.
SRS not to jeopardize noise and vibration isolation systems. Provide 4-8 mm clearance between
seismic restraint snubbers and equipment during normal operation of equipment and systems.
Cushioning action to be gentle and steady by utilizing elastomeric material or other means in order
to avoid high impact loads.
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
Brace back to structure via vibration isolators and snubbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Attachment points and fasteners:
.1
To withstand same maximum load that seismic restraint is to resist and in all directions.
.2
Install SRS at least 25 mm from all other equipment, systems, services.
.3
Miscellaneous equipment not vibration-isolated:
.1
Bolt through house-keeping pad to structure.
.4
Co-ordinate connections with all disciplines.
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
.1
SRS to be inspected and certified by Manufacturer upon completion of installation.
.2
Provide written report stamped by professional Engineer licensed in Ontario to Departmental
Representative with signed certificate of compliance with the SRS design requirements.
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
.1
Upon completion and acceptance of certification, hand over to Departmental Representative complete set
of construction documents, revised to show "as-built" conditions.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA-C22.2 No. 42-10, General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Devices.
.2
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 42.1-00 (R2009), Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices
(Bi-national standard, with UL 514D).
.3
CSA C22.2 No. 55-M1986 (R2012), Special Use Switches.
.4
CSA C22.2 No. 111-10, General-use Snap Switches.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.5
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and their installation.
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management
and Disposal.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging
material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
Project No. R.067898.002
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
SWITCHES
.1
20 A, 120 V, single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way switches to: CSA-C22.2 No. 55 and
CSA-C22.2 No. 111.
.2
Manually-operated general purpose ac switches with following features:
.1
Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.
.2
Silver alloy contacts.
.3
Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking.
.4
Suitable for back and side wiring.
.5
White toggle.
.3
Toggle operated fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to 80% of rated
capacity of motor loads. Rated 120V, 20A.
.4
Switches of one manufacturer throughout project.
RECEPTACLES
.1
Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, to: CSA-C22.2 No. 42 with following
features:
.1
White nylon face moulded housing, Decora style.
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.
.3
Break-off links for use as split receptacles.
.4
Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws.
.5
Triple wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts.
.2
Single receptacles CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground with following features:
.1
White urea moulded housing.
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.
.3
Four back wired entrances, 2 side wiring screws.
.3
Other receptacles with CSA configuration, ampacity and voltage as indicated. Specification grade,
nylon face, white.
.4
Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project.
.5
Self-contained with 15 A, 120 V circuit interrupter and white duplex receptacle complete with:
.1
Solid state ground sensing device.
.2
Facility for testing and reset.
SPECIAL WIRING DEVICES
.1
Special wiring devices:
.1
Clock hanger outlets, 15 A, 125 V, 3 wire, grounding type, suitable for No. 10 AWG for
installation in flush outlet box.
.2
Pilot lights as indicated, with neon type 0.04 W, 125 V lamp and red plastic LED type.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
2.4
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
Page 3
Wall Mounted Motion Sensor Switches: Dual technology passive infrared and ultrasonic to turn lights
off after adjustable time delay. Tamperproof for programming manual "on" and automatic "off" at
5-30 minute delay. Automatically adjusts time delay for usage pattern. Automatic audible/visual
alerts/light sensor with adjustable sensitivity, vandal resistant lense.
COVER PLATES
.1
Cover plates for wiring devices to: CSA C22.2 No. 42.1.
.2
Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project.
.3
Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surface-mounted utility boxes.
.4
Stainless steel, 1 mm thick cover plates cover plates, thickness 2.5 mm for wiring devices mounted in
flush-mounted outlet box.
.5
Sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit
boxes.
.6
Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates, complete with gaskets for duplex
receptacles as indicated.
.7
Weatherproof spring-loaded cover plates complete with gaskets for single receptacles or switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Switches:
.1
Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.
.2
Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location.
.3
Mount toggle switches at height in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results
for Electrical as indicated.
.2
Receptacles:
.1
Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one
location.
.2
Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section 26 05 00 for Common Work Results
for Electrical as indicated.
.3
Where split receptacle has one portion switched, mount vertically and switch upper portion.
.3
Cover plates:
.1
Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work
is finished.
.2
Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.
.3
Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.
.4
Motion sensor switch adjustments:
.1
Set motion sensor programming switches for Manual On/Automatic Off, 15 minute time delay
off, Light sensitivity to midrange, SmartSet On, walk-thru mode On, audible alert On.
.2
Provide min. 3 hours manufacturer training for typical set up.
Project No. R.067898.002
.5
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
Page 4
Labelling:
.1
Provide labelling in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Section 26 28 16.02
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
Materials for moulded-case circuit breakers.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 5-13, Molded-case Circuit Breakers, Molded-case Switches and Circuit-breaker
Enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Prior to any installation of circuit breakers in either a new or existing installation, Contractor must submit
three (3) copies of a certificate of origin, from the manufacturer, duly signed by the factory and the local
manufacturer's representative, certifying that all circuit breakers come from this manufacturer, they are
new and they meet standards and regulations. These certificates must be submitted to the Departmental
Representative for approval.
.2
A delay in the production of the certificate of origin won't justify any extension of the contract: and
additional compensation.
.3
Any work of manufacturing, assembly or installation should begin only after acceptance of the certificate
of origin by Departmental Representative. Unless complying with this requirement, Departmental
Representative reserves the right to mandate the manufacturer listed on circuit breakers to authenticate all
new circuit breakers under the contract, and that, to Contractor's expense.
.4
In general, the certificate of origin must contain:
.1
The name and address of the manufacturer and the person responsible for authentication. The
responsible person must sign and date the certificate;
.2
The name and address of the licensed dealer and the person of the distributor responsible for the
Contractor's account.
.3
The name and address of the Contractor and the person responsible for the project.
.4
The name and address of the local manufacturer's representative. The local representative must
sign and date the certificate.
.5
The name and address of the building where circuit breakers will be installed:
.1
Project title.
.2
End user's reference number.
.3
The list of circuit breakers.
.5
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Project No. R.067898.002
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Section 26 28 16.02
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
BREAKERS GENERAL
.1
Moulded-case circuit breakers: to CSA C22.2 No. 5.
.2
Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation
with temperature compensation for 40°ambient.
.3
Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
.4
Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current reaches
setting.
.1
Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current rating.
.5
Circuit breakers over 60 A to have minimum 35,000 A symmetrical rms interrupting capacity rating.
THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS
.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices
to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install circuit breakers in existing panelboards as indicated.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED
SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 4-M04 (R2009), Enclosed Switches.
.1
Non-fusible, disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure, to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 4 size as
indicated.
.2
Provision for padlocking in off switch position by three locks.
.3
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
.4
Quick-make, quick-break action.
.5
ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common
Work Results for Electrical.
.2
Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.
.1
Install disconnect switches as shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
2.2 EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
END
Project No. R.067898.002
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
.2
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include
product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
Provide complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires
where specified, for review by Departmental Representative.
.3
Photometric data to include: spacing criterion, coefficient of utilization table, luminaire efficient.
.3
Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality
Control.
.1
Manufacturer's instructions: provide manufacturer's written installation instructions and special
handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures and.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.5
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
Provide one initial in standalone of every fixture type for review on site of mounting details,
orientation, aiming and lamping, prior to continuing with balance of fixture installation. Provide power
to fixture for initial installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with project schedule.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets crates
paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management and
Disposal.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps as per local regulations.
.6
Disposal of old PCB filled ballasts.
Project No. R.067898.002
1.6
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 2
PROOF OF ORDER
.1
Contractor to provide a proof of order via copy of purchase order or other suitable document from
supplier, within 4 weeks of approval of shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LAMPS
.1
2.2
BALLASTS
.1
2.3
Light fixture finish and construction to meet ULC listings and CSA certifications related to intended
installation.
OPTICAL CONTROL DEVICES
.1
2.5
Fluorescent ballast: CBM and CSA certified, energy efficient type.
.1
Rating: 347 V, 60 Hz, for use with 1 or 2-32W, T8 lamps.
.2
Totally encased and designed for 40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature.
.3
Ballast factor: as indicated on fixture schedule.
.4
Current crest factor: 1.7 maximum.
.5
Harmonics: 10 % maximum THD.
.6
Operating frequency of electronic ballast: 20 kHz minimum.
.7
Ballast factor: to be between 0.8 and 1.0 to be determined at shop dwg stage.
.8
Sound rated: Class A.
.9
Mounting: integral with luminaire.
FINISHES
.1
2.4
Standard fluorescent lamps to be - T8, medium bi-pin, mercury free 4100 K, 30,000 hour lamp life,
2900 initial lumens, CRI 85; or as indicated.
As indicated in Lighting Fixture Schedule.
LUMINAIRES
.1
As indicated in Lighting Fixture Schedule.
Project No. R.067898.002
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate and install luminaires as indicated.
.2
Provide adequate support to suit ceiling system.
.3
Where relocated fixture contains no ballast, provide new single lamp ballast in fixture. Where
relocated fixture contains a 4-lamp ballast, relocate ballast to remaining fixtures in the area.
WIRING
.1
3.3
LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS
.1
3.4
3.5
Connect luminaires to lighting circuits:
.1
Install flexible or rigid conduit for luminaires.
For suspended ceiling installations support luminaires independently of ceiling.
LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT
.1
Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line.
.2
Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.
CLEANING
.1
Clean fixtures, housings lamps, reflectors & lenses with clean damp cloth prior to final acceptance.
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
1.3
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
Empty telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, conduits,
cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, service poles, service fittings, concrete encased
ducts.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management
and Disposal.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard packaging material
in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal conduit and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings.
.2
Outlet boxes type, conduit boxes size, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 - Splitters,
Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.3
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
Project No. R.067898.002
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28
Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, in ceiling space distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet
boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, miscellaneous and positioning
material to constitute complete system.
.2
For each data communication outlet shown, provide a minimum 21 mm C from outlet, up to ceiling
space or as indicated.
.3
Provide sleeves with bushings, min. 27 mm, from common corridor ceiling space to each enclosed
room or as indicated.
END
Project No. R.067898.002
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 1 of 12
WORKPLACE 2.0 – SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION
1.
PART ONE – GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sound masking systems
1.2. REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
UL6500 / ULC 60065 – Standard for Audio/Video and Musical Instrument Apparatus for
Household, Commercial and Similar General Use
UL 2043 – Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products
and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces; 1996
FCC – EN 55103-1&2 – Audio, Video and Entertainment Lighting Control
ASTM E1374-06 (11) – Standard Guide for Open Office Acoustics and Applicable ASTM
Standards
ASTM E1573-09 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masking Sound in Open Office
Using A-Weighted and One-Third Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels
ASTM E1130-08 – Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of Speech Privacy in
Open Offices Using Articulation Index
ASTM E2638 - Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of Speech Privacy Provide
by Closed Rooms
ANSI S12.2 - 2008 – Criteria for Evaluating Room Noise
2011 ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications
1.3. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
System Architecture
1.
Sound masking systems and their components requiring communications and transfer
of electronic data between them shall use wired connections and shall not use
wireless, Wi-Fi, or other telemetry based systems in any aspect of their functionality
The system shall be a plenum based system, independent from ceiling constructions.
The system shall consist of, centralized control unit(s), and addressable and
controllable masking devices, distributed throughout the installation area on a given
floor.
The addressable and controllable masking devices shall limit the number of
loudspeakers assigned to each to a maximum of 3 loudspeakers. Each addressable
and controllable masking device and its associate loudspeakers shall be denoted as a
“zone”
The system must provide the capability for in-room occupant control devices. (As an
available non-standard design option.) The minimal requirements for in-room occupant
controls are specified in Section 1.3.I
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Sound Masking Operational Performance
1.
The system shall use digital signal processing (DSP) technology for masking sound
generation and output adjustment of masking signals.
The masking sound shall be generated via a truly-random, non-deterministic digital
process with no repeat cycle.
The system shall provide independently controllable masking zones that efficiently
allow the ability to control and monitor the operation of each zone and provide,
2.
3.
i.
ii.
a third-octave equalizer with minimum of 18 bands, ranging from 100Hz to
5,000Hz
an independent masking volume control providing minimum 0.5 dBA volume
increments and an output range of 35 to 85 dBA @ 1m from the loudspeaker
Project No. R.067898.002
iii.
iv.
4.
i.
C.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 2 of 12
a temporary mute function for the masking output
the ability to completely disable the masking output
The system shall provide a function to allow a gradual ramp up of masking volume
each time power is applied
This functionality shall have a programmable ramp up rate, as well as
enabled/disabled feature, controlled from central control device. .
Sound Masking Zone Design
1.
The departmental representative shall provide qualifying suppliers tendering
information which includes, scaled fit-up drawings of overall floor plans and/or
specifications indicating,
i.
open office areas; fully and partially enclosed rooms; public lobbies, corridors
and waiting areas
ii.
fully and partially enclosed rooms partition types (e.g. slab to slab; slab to
ceiling; plenum barriers)
iii.
the ceiling type(s), heights; plenum
iv.
structural/architectural/mechanical/electrical or other design details limiting or
restricting access to plenum space and proper installation of sound masking
system components (e.g. primary air duct routing),
v.
wiring routing requirements (e.g., conduit sleeves if required for slab to slab
walls)
vi.
rooms requiring in room occupant controls;
vii.
speech security zones and specific requirements for rooms requiring speech
privacy/security protection to be provided by sound masking, including
communication, monitoring and alerting requirements as determined by
departmental representatives, security, acoustical and communications
specialist.
viii.
Any other details related to supplier’s design, installation and material costing
requirements
2.
Sound masking zone area shall be defined by, the independently addressable and
controllable masking devices and associated loudspeakers, and comply with Section
1.3.A
3.
i.
4.
Private offices and meeting rooms and other fully enclosed rooms having slab to slab
partitions, and/or plenum barriers enclosing their plenum space.
i.
5.
i.
6.
Open Office Areas (common/shared plenum)
Shall consist of multiple individual zones, each zone shall be limited to a
maximum of 3 loud speakers, such that the acoustical performance
requirements specified in 1.3.D are maintained in each zone, and between all
zones.
Shall each be an independently controllable zone, or multiple zones, such that
the acoustical performance requirements specified in Section 1.3.C and D are
maintained.
Adjacent partially enclosed rooms having floor to ceiling partitions, and common
shared plenum space. (no plenum barriers)
A maximum of 2 adjacent and partially enclosed rooms may be included within a
single zone’s coverage area such that the maximum masking devices in 1.3.A
and performance requirements specified in 1.3.,C and D are maintained.
Conference and large meeting rooms and/or those that make use of audio
enhancement/sound reinforcement systems, (microphones/public address systems,
audio translation systems, etc.), broadcasting and/or similar special purpose rooms
requiring high levels of speech intelligibility, will require special acoustical and audio
design considerations in regards to the use sound masking, if used,
Project No. R.067898.002
i.
7.
i.
8.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 3 of 12
Each speaker shall be considered a zone, and in-room occupant control devices
shall be provided which include the minimal features listed in Section 1.3.I.
Public servicing areas, corridors, lobbies, waiting areas and other public and common
areas
Shall meet the zonal requirements 1.3.A and acoustical and operational
performance requirements in Section 1.3 C and D.
Speech Security Zones
(It is assumed, that the level of speech security protection required and zones have
been defined by the appropriate security procedures; and appropriate acoustical
expertise has been retained to, provide the rooms required design and construction
details; determine the sound masking system’s operational requirements in conjunction
with the supplier; verify speech security performance has been achieved upon
commissioning. When sound masking is integral to meeting the speech security
protection requirements the following specifications must be met)
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
D.
Within a Speech Security Zones (SSZ), each speaker and its associated devices
shall be considered as an independent zone with the central control unit setup
for monitoring and logging operational status in real time.
The supplier shall setup and enable the central control units communications
interface to allow it to facilitate direct and/or remote communications with
departmental representatives monitoring system, and/or to provide automated
alerts of its operational status in real-time. Minimal operation requirements to
meet speech security requirements are provided in Sections 1.3.E, F, M, N.
The supplier must provide departmental representative with detailed technical
manuals including the communication protocols and materials required to link
multiple control unit (s) within a facility and to access and monitor operational
status of secure zones. The supplier may also provide proprietary monitoring
software as an optional item.
It shall be the departmental representatives responsibility to, determine and
facilitate communication, monitoring/alert methodologies, and ensure that
communications and security requirements are maintained;
It shall be the departmental representatives responsibility to provide any
computer equipment or other resources required for monitoring security
requirements.
Sound Masking Systems Acoustical Performance
1.
The supplier shall setup the sound masking system to meet acoustical performance
requirements when HVAC systems are functioning under what is considered a “normal”
mode of operation for occupied periods.
i.
It is the departmental representatives responsibility to ensure HVAC systems are
operating as required during sound masking system’s scheduled commissioning
and that background noise levels generated by HVAC systems comply with
applicable industry standards references Section 1.2.H, I).
ii.
The departmental representative should make efforts to provide supplier
tendering information indicating any locations where existing building noise
exceeds HVAC acoustical performance standards and/or the preferred sound
masking spectrum levels identified in Section 1.3.D.3,4,5.
iii.
The departmental representative shall make efforts to provide supplier tendering
information indicating any building design details or other constraints which may
affect the sound masking system’s proper installation and operational
requirements.
iv.
The supplier shall not be responsible to meet acoustical performance
requirements in locations where, existing background noise exceeds masking
noise levels, and/or where building design details or other constraints prevent its
proper installation, setup and operation..
Project No. R.067898.002
v.
2.
3.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 4 of 12
Locations not meeting acoustical performance requirements, and not the result
of departmental representative’s negligence and/or other existing site conditions
or constraints, shall be corrected at the supplier’s expense by any means
necessary within compliance of this specification, and any other applicable
codes and regulations..
Upon completion of installation, and final setup the supplier shall provide a report to
departmental representative of the sound masking systems acoustical performance as
per requirements in Section 3.9.
The target sound masking overall dBA levels for each type of area shall be as follows,
Open office spaces, 47 dBA
Fully enclosed offices, meeting or similar rooms with slab to slab/or plenum
barrier partitions, 42 dBA
iii.
Adjacent partially enclosed rooms, with floor to ceiling partitions only (no plenum
barriers) 43 dBA;
iv.
corridors, lobbies, public servicing and waiting and other common areas, 47
dBA.
v.
In room occupant controls, when used, shall be set not to exceed 42 dBA
i.
ii.
4.
The target sound masking frequency spectrum to be used shall be that provided in
1.3.D.5, Table 1. Developed by National Research Council of Canada (NRC) and
denoted as NRC Optimal Sound Masking Spectrum (nominal @45 dBA)
i.
5.
All zones shall conform to the overall dBA the sound and the one-third octave spectrum
dB levels defined in 1.3.D.5 - Table 1, to within the tolerances provided below.
i.
ii.
6.
The frequency contour provided shall be maintained at different dBA target
levels by equally applying the positive or negative difference, between the
nominal 45 dBA level and the target dBA level, to each of the one-third octave
frequency band’s dB level, so as to equally shift the entire contour. (e.g. A target
level of 42 dBA, will required shifting the entire 45 dBA spectrum down equally
by 3 dB in each of the 1/3 octave frequency bands)
Overall dBA levels measured within zones and between adjacent zones of the
same office type shall be within +/- 11.0 dBA, of the specified target level..
Spectrum uniformity measured within zones or between adjacent zones of the
same office type shall vary no more than +/- two (2) dB from the 1/3 octave
band contour levels indicated in Table 1, as adjusted to meet the overall dBA
target level, as indicated in 1.3.D.4.
Table 1 – NRC Optimal Sound Masking Spectrum.
Project No. R.067898.002
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 5 of 12
Table 1: NRC Optimal Sound Masking Spectrum – Nominal 45 dBA Contour
E.
1/3 Octave Band
Center Frequency
1/3 Octave dB Sound Levels
( overall = 45 dBA nominal)
Hz
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1,000
1,250
1,600
2,000
2,500
3,150
4,000
5,000
dB
46.9
45.9
44.7
43.9
42.7
41.4
40.4
38.9
37.4
35.4
33.7
31.4
29.4
27.4
24.9
22.4
19.4
16.4
System Control
i.
ii.
iii.
2.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
The system shall provide setup/programming/control of operational parameter,
as well monitoring and logging operational status for each masking zone from a
centrally located control unit or units (s). The number of control units are based
on the capacity and feasibility of zones possible per control unit.
Programming and querying of each masking devices through the control unit
may be provided as an integrated display and key panel directly on control unit
or through an external proprietary device provided by supplier and included as
part of the sound masking system
The system must also provide, a wired interface to allow connection to control
unit through the use of a personal computer, laptop or similar device (not
provided by supplier); and a supplier developed software to allow system
programming, control and management of the system’s operational parameters.
.
The control panel component, or suppliers external device and/or PC based software
shall provide controls for:
networked device addressing
system setup and configuration
masking volume and contour adjustment
system zoning for masking, timer and room control functions
masking timer programming
Project No. R.067898.002
vi.
vii.
3.
F.
The systems operational features and/or supplier installation report documentation
shall provide a means of identifying the location of any masking devices identified in
the control units operational logs as malfunctioning
Timer Performance
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
2.
i.
ii.
The networked masking devices shall be capable of being zoned for masking, timer,
and in-room control functions.
Zoning of networked masking devices shall be performed digitally.
Assignments to each type of zone shall be independent of each other.
The masking devices shall be capable of being individually rezoned without rewiring.
2.
3.
4.
In-Room Occupant Control
1.
The system shall have the capability of providing (optional) in-room manual control of
masking volume and functionality for zones as small as one loudspeaker.
The in-room control shall:
2.
i.
ii.
iii.
J.
provide control of masking volumes independently from main control unit
be capable of restricting the range of allowable volume adjustment for masking
be capable of individually muting the masking output
System Cabling
1.
2.
K.
The control unit and/or PC/software shall provide masking timer function that includes:
automatic masking volume adjustments according to custom departmental
representative-programmed schedules
the ability to digitally assign any group of masking zones to a selected time
schedule
calendar-based operation
automatic and departmental representative-defined daylight savings adjustment
The timer function in each control panel component shall provide independent timer
zones, each with:
a programmable 15-day acclimatization function that automatically increases the
masking volume according to a departmental representative-defined schedule
a programmable activation date for the acclimatization function
System Zoning
1.
I.
security functions
system diagnostics, logging and real-time monitoring
Addressing
1.
H.
27 51 19
Page 6 of 12
The system shall also provide the capability for multiple central control units to be
interconnected using standards communication and data protocols for interfacing with
building management systems and/or from a central computer location.
1.
G.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
The system shall use cabling rated for air-handling plenums.
Cabling connections shall be made using connectors with positive locking
mechanisms.
Diagnostic Performance
1.
Upon initial configuration, the system shall:
automatically detect the number and type of networked devices connected to
each control panel component
ii.
automatically detect the number of loudspeakers connected to each networked
device, and in total, per control panel component
iii.
verify that each networked device is communicating with the control panel
component
i.
Project No. R.067898.002
iv.
v.
2.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
3.
i.
ii.
4.
5.
6.
i.
ii.
L.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 7 of 12
indicate the address of networked devices that are not communicating with the
control panel component
verify the integrity of the system design, including required components,
communication limits and power limits
The system shall provide a loudspeaker monitoring function that:
detects deviations from the expected number of functioning loudspeakers
connected to each networked device, whether due to incorrect installation or
speaker/cabling malfunctions
initiates notifications upon detecting a speaker count error
is available over a wide range of masking settings
be capable of being enabled/disabled
The system shall provide continuous voltage metering that detects and reports on the
availability of sufficient voltage at each networked device for ideal operation. This
function shall:
initiate notifications when insufficient voltage is measured at a given networked
device
be capable of being enabled/disabled
The system shall provide a function for locating loudspeakers from below the ceiling,
producing an audible tone burst.
Diagnostics shall be viewable from a control panel component or computer software.
The system shall provide (as per project design) monitoring/notification software that is
capable of monitoring the status of all networked devices (including control panel
components) and which is also capable of:
email notification of errors to departmental representative-defined addresses
email notification of ‘all well’ at departmental representative-defined periods
Reporting Performance
1.
The system shall be capable of reporting:
i.
control panel component parameters
ii.
the quantity and type of networked devices connected to each control panel
component
iii.
masking output settings for each networked masking device
iv.
zone assignments
v.
timer schedules
vi.
in-room occupant control settings
vii.
the networked devices’ serial numbers and software/firmware versions (including
control panel components)
2.
The system shall be capable of generating reports in printed and editable electronic
formats.
M.
Security Performance
1.
The system shall provide physical security measures, including:
the control panel component shall be contained in a key-locked metal enclosure
cable connections to the control panel component shall be made inside the
locked enclosure
iii.
no physical output controls shall be located on the networked masking devices
or loudspeakers
The system shall provide electronic security measures, including:
i.
password-protected access levels
ii.
departmental representative-definable access to the functions available at each
level
iii.
backup of all settings to an electronic storage medium
iv.
continuous monitoring of communications with each networked device
v.
loudspeaker monitoring
vi.
support for internal and external alarm device activation upon detection of
communication error
vii.
option for email notification upon detection of system error
viii.
128-bit encrypted communication between the control panel components and
any computer
i.
ii.
2.
Project No. R.067898.002
ix.
x.
xi.
N.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 8 of 12
storage of settings in non-volatile memory in each networked masking device
and control panel component, which shall be maintained during power outages
optional external relay modules for connection to third-party alarm devices or
security monitoring equipment
exception date programming for the masking timer function
Failsafe Power Supply
1.
The system shall provide (as per project design) a power component that:
incorporates two independent power supplies designed to jointly power the
system while both are in operation
ii.
provides automatic and uninterrupted power transition in the event of a single
power supply failure
iii.
provides monitoring of power supply failure
i.
O.
Aesthetics
1.
The system shall be aesthetically appealing in open ceiling applications, including:
networked masking devices and loudspeakers shall be visually appealing
cabling shall be color-matched to the networked masking devices and
loudspeakers
iii.
loudspeaker suspension shall be braided steel cable (as per project design)
iv.
cabling shall be connector-based
v.
networked masking devices, loudspeakers and cabling shall be available in
white or charcoal (as per project design)
i.
ii.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.
System Design: Schematics of the system showing quantity and location of components,
related cabling and accessories.
Warranty Documents: Warranty documents covering the system components.
C.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
System Design: Performed by an approved manufacturer representative.
Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer representative and are trained with the
specified components or have demonstrated experience with the installation of similar
products to those specified.
System Adjustment: Done by an approved manufacturer representative or trained
contractor.
C.
1.4. REGULATORY TESTING AND CERTIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The relevant system components shall conform to:
Canada
Safety and Electrical
i.
IEC 60065 – Standard for Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Apparatus Safety Requirements. Products shall be labelled accordingly.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
i.
ICES-003 (Industry Canada) – Interference-Causing Equipment Standard.
Cabling
i.
UL CL3P/CMP 75C. Products shall be labeled accordingly.
Heavy Metals
i.
RoHS – Restriction of Hazardous Substances (voluntary).
Low Voltage Power Supplies
i.
UL1310, Standard for Class 2 Power Units. Products shall be labeled
accordingly.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Project No. R.067898.002
A.
B.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 9 of 12
Protect from moisture during shipping, storage and handling.
Deliver in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged packages with manufacturer’s
labels legible and intact.
Inspect manufacturer’s packages upon receipt.
Handle packages carefully.
C.
D.
1.6. WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
A.
2.
Provide a written warranty that the system components installed shall be free from defects
in parts or assembly for a 5-year period from date of first use (the date of system
initialization).
PART TWO – PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers, those able to meet all these specifications
2.2. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
General System Overview: The sound masking system shall be a networked decentralized system
with complete digital, central control down to individually addressable networked masking devices.
The system shall be comprised of a selection of a) distributed primary networked masking devices;
b) distributed secondary networked masking devices; c) loudspeakers; d) one or more control panel
components; e) computer software; f) programmable keypads; g) cable assemblies; h) audio input
modules; i) ceiling mount adaptors; and j) one or more power supplies.
A.
Each primary masking device shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A DSP-based masking sound generator
An individual third-octave -band equalizer for masking
An individual volume control for masking
Network communication functions
An audio amplifier
Overall dimensions of:
i.
ii.
B.
Diameter
Height
5.1 inches; 13.0 cm
1.75 inches; 4.5 cm
Each secondary networked masking device shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
A loudspeaker connection
Signal connections to/from other primary/secondary networked masking devices
Overall dimensions of:
i.
ii.
C.
Diameter
Height
5.1 inches; 13.0 cm
1.75 inches; 4.5 cm
Each loudspeaker shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A connection to masking devices
A suspension chain at least 20 inches (51 cm) in length and tool-less length
adjustment clip
An acoustically damped enclosure
Tool-less, on-site adjustment of upward/downward loudspeaker orientation
Overall dimensions of:
i.
ii.
Diameter
Height
6.5 inches; 16.5 cm
3.5 inches; 9.0 cm
Project No. R.067898.002
6.
Diameter
Power Rating
Sensitivity
Frequency Response
Impedance
Magnet Structure Weight
4.0 inches; 10.0 cm
25 Watts RMS
87 dBA @ 1W / 1m
100 - 10,000 Hz (+/- 6 dB)
16 Ohms
17.6 oz; 500 g
Each control panel component shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
Network communication components
Network control electronics for masking and timer functions
Connections to networked devices, additional control panel components and a
computer
Serial connection for third-party control systems (optional model)
Ethernet connection and IP addressability
Overall dimensions of:
4.
5.
6.
i. Height
ii. Width
iii. Depth
E.
9.4 inches; 23.8 cm
11.0 inches; 28.0 cm
3.2 inches; 8.0 cm
System control software to:
1.
Allow control of all system adjustments from a computer, including:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
2.
3.
F.
System setup
Sound masking volume and equalization
Sound masking timer programs
In-room occupant control setup
Allow the reporting of all system settings
Perform system diagnostics
Monitoring/notification software to:
1.
2.
G.
Provide email notification of errors to departmental representative-defined addresses
Provide email notification of ‘all well’ at departmental representative-defined periods
Each programmable keypad shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Function selection and volume adjustments
An interface for controlling volume increase/decrease, mute
An enclosure capable of being installed in a single gang box
Cable assemblies to:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Provide power, and control signals over a single cable assembly
Provide over molded micro-connectors with positive locking mechanisms
Meet air-handing plenum standards (UL - CMP 75C or CSA – 75C TYPE CMP FT-6)
Ceiling mount adaptors to:
1.
J.
27 51 19
Page 10 of 12
A loudspeaker driver with:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
D.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
Attach on-site to convert plenum loudspeakers to ceiling plate loudspeakers
Power supplies to:
Project No. R.067898.002
1.
3.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 11 of 12
Power the networked devices and control panel components
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1. SYSTEM DESIGN
A.
Design system according to manufacturer’s specifications.
3.2. EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ensure that facility build out is at a stage suitable for the system installation.
Ensure that facility is constructed according to plans, including wall locations, ceiling types
and plenum barriers.
Ensure that the plenum height is appropriate as per manufacturer’s recommendations and
as per plan.
Ensure power requirements have been provided as per plan.
Ensure sufficient space for centrally located components is available as per plan and
manufacturer’s specifications.
Ensure any third-party components required to be interfaced with the system have been
provided.
3.3. PERMITS
A.
Obtain necessary permits for installation work.
3.4. INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Follow all applicable codes for the area.
Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding installation.
Follow the system design for location of loudspeakers and wiring.
Record any necessary changes to the system design on the plan.
Ensure that supplementary materials used meet applicable safety standards.
3.5. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ensure that plenum heights meet the minimum recommended by the manufacturer for the
loudspeakers.
Ensure that the distance between the top of the loudspeaker and the deck meets
manufacturer’s minimum specifications.
Ensure that loudspeakers are suspended in a level manner.
Minimize obstructions to loudspeakers, to the extent possible.
Ensure cables are properly supported in the ceiling.
Ensure cables are securely terminated.
3.6. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for system settings as found in the User Manual.
3.7. CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Ensure that empty packaging is removed. ** Please recycle **
Ensure that any material waste is removed.
Ensure the system components are clean and presentable where required.
3.8. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
B.
Demonstrate operational system to customer by walking the space.
Demonstrate functionality of the system to the customer or customer’s representative.
Project No. R.067898.002
C.
SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS
27 51 19
Page 12 of 12
Provide any training to customer’s representative that may be required under the terms of
the contract to maintain and/or operate the system or any optional devices (e.g., in room
controls)
Special training may be provided for sound masking systems monitoring software, when
operation requires monitoring for speech security requirements.
D.
3.9. TESTING AND REPORTING
A.
The supplier shall provide the departmental representative a report including at a minimal;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
An as- installed floor plan indicating speaker layout and wiring routing between control
unit and speakers. The floor plan should also indicate commissioning measurement
locations for each zone.
A listing of any identification labeling used on components (speakers, hubs, control
devices, wiring) and as referenced in the sound masking software to allow physically
locating devices within the plenum/floor plan.
An indication of tolerance compliance dBA and spectrum in each zone. Results may
be provided in table format and/or plotted graphically.
An indication of locations, if applicable, where acoustical performance was not
achieved. These should be clearly indicated on a plan, with rationale provided if not
previously identified by departmental representative as having an existing issue.
The supplier shall include a letter of conformance upon final setup, certifying that the
acoustical performance requirements have been achieved in all zones, with any
exceptions listed.
Sound masking systems used to provide specific levels of speech security to specific
closed rooms will require addition accurate details of sound levels, hardware locations
and labeling in order to quickly address any alerts received. The speech security
protection achieved shall not be considered the suppliers responsibility to determine
achieved
As previously stated these requirements require special design
considerations and in the sound masking system’s supply contract and terms of
references
The departmental representative reserves the right, at their own expense, to conduct third
party testing and verification of acoustical performance. The measurements of acoustical
performance shall be made in accordance with appropriate sections of current ASTM
E1573, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masking Sound in Open Office Using AWeighted and One-Third Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels, with HVAC systems
functioning under a “normal” mode of operation, as when would be during normally occupied
time periods..
1.
If it is determined by departmental representative that acoustical performance has not
been achieved, not as a result of existing background sound levels, building conditions
or departmental representative negligence, they shall be corrected at the supplier’s
expense. This may be achieved through software control and/or modification to sound
masking system layout, and/or additional /replacement of components, hardware or as
may be required and determined by supplier, within compliance of this specification,
and applicable codes and/or regulations.
-------------------End of Document --------------------------------------------
Project No. R.067898.002
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for fire alarm systems.
.2
New devices to be connected to an existing control panel to carry out fire alarm and protection
functions including receiving alarm signals, initiating general alarm, supervising system
continuously, actuating zone annunciators, and initiating trouble signals.
.3
Audible signal devices.
.2
Related Sections:
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results.
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
National Fire Protection Agency
.1
NFPA (Fire) 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2013
Edition.
.3
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC S524-06-AMI, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, Includes
Amendment 1 (Feb 2011) .
.2
CAN/ULC S525-07, Audible Signal Devices for Fire Alarm Systems, Including Accessories.
.3
CAN/ULC S527-11, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance
with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.2
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Shop drawings: stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in
Province of Ontario, Canada.
.2
Include:
.1
Layout of equipment.
.2
Zoning.
.3
Complete wiring diagram, including schematics of modules.
.3
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
.4
1.4
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Close Out Submittals in accordance with NFPA (Fire) 20.
.2
Authority of Jurisdiction will delegate authority for review and approval of submittals required
by this Section.
.3
Submit to Authority of Jurisdiction 2 sets of approved submittals and drawings immediately
after approval but no later than 15 working days to prior to final inspection.
.4
Submit following:
.1
Manufacturer's Data for:
.1
Alarm speakers.
.2
Wiring.
.2
System wiring diagrams:
.1
Submit wiring diagrams of system showing points of connection and terminals used
for electrical connections in the system.
.3
Design data: Power Calculations:
.1
Submit design calculations for existing system and new work specified to
substantiate that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power
requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
Installer: company or person specializing in fire alarm system installations with 5 -years
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
.2
Provide services of representative or technician from manufacturer of system, experienced in
installation and operation of type of system being provided, to supervise installation, adjustment,
preliminary testing, and final testing of system and to provide instruction to project personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Section 28 31 00
Page 2
MATERIALS
.1
Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and supplied by single manufacturer.
.2
Audible signal devices: to CAN/ULC S525.
EXISTING SYSTEM OPERATION
.1
Two stage operation. Operation to actuation following:
.1
Manual station.
.2
Heat detector.
.3
Smoke detector.
.4
Automatic fire sprinkler system.
.5
Fire extinguishing system.
.6
Fire standpipe system.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
2.3
2.5
Actuation of two operation device to initiate following:
.1
Building evacuation alarm devices to operate continuously.
.2
Transmit signal to fire department via monitoring station.
.3
Zone of alarm device to be indicated on control panel and remote annunciators.
.4
Ventilating fans to shut down or to function so as to provide required control of smoke
movement.
.5
Fire doors and smoke control doors if normally held open, to close automatically.
.6
Electro-magnetic door holders to de-energize.
.7
Operations to remain in alarm mode (except alarm notification appliances if manually silenced)
until system is manually restored to normal.
Existing fire alarm in Jean Talon Building is a Simplex system model 2500 NDU Command Centre.
Existing fire alarm in R.H. Coats Building is a Siemens model MXLV system.
AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICES
.1
Audible device(s):
.1
Speakers: 24 V dc, 200 mm, white.
.2
Do not exceed 80 percent of listed rating in amperes of notification appliance circuit. Provide
additional circuits above those shown if required to meet this requirement.
.3
For surface mounting provide appliance manufacturer's approved back box. Back box finish to
match appliance finish.
CONDUIT
.1
2.6
Section 28 31 00
Page 3
CONTROL PANEL
.1
2.4
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):.
WIRING
.1
Wire for 120 V circuits: No. 12 AWG minimum solid copper conductor.
.2
Wire for low voltage DC circuits: No. 14 AWG minimum solid copper conductor
.3
Insulation 75 degrees C minimum with nylon jacket.
.4
Colour code wiring.
Project No. R.067898.002
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including
product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC S524 and TB OSH Chapter 3-04.
.2
Install new modules as required to existing main control panel.
.3
Connect alarm circuits to main control panel.
.4
Locate and install signal and connect to signalling circuits.
.5
Connect signalling circuits to main control panel.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests:
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - for Electrical
and CAN/ULC S537.
.2
Fire alarm system:
.1
Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are shown correctly.
.2
Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signalling circuits to ensure proper operation
of system.
.3
Class A circuits.
.1
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on each
side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit.
Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after
completion of each test.
.2
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during
ground-fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit
after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.
.4
Class B circuits.
.1
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on line side
of single open-circuit fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on
circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after
completion of each test.
.2
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during
ground-fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset
control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of
each test.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing,
applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as
described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
Project No. R.067898.002
.2
.3
3.4
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 5
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic
site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess
materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement